The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutReport Suyzoig- Doo3 RECF/ c kil A GG C�j', 2 B 20/4 SW 67th Ayft c 11565 SW 67th'Ave �_ Tigard, Oregon Project Manual Permit Set Divisions 00-14 28 AUG 2014 Project Number: 2014-01 OFFICE COPY Infinite Architecture PO Box 664 Donald,OR 97020 P.503.989.2992 F.503.776-9013 I PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A. 00 01 10 -Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 --GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. 01 10 00 - Summary B. 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures C. 01 21 00 -Allowances D. 01 22 00 - Unit Prices E. 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements F. 01 40 00-Quality Requirements G. 01 50 00-Temporary Facilities and Controls H. 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control I. 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls J. 01 58 13 -Temporary Project Signage K. 01 60 00 - Product Requirements L. 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements M. 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal N. 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals O. 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS A. 02 41 00 - Demolition 2.03 DIVISION 03 --CONCRETE A. 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A. 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry 2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications B. 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs C. 05 52 13- Pipe and Tube Railings D. 05 53 05 - Metal Gratings and Floor Plates E. 05 71 13 - Fabricated Metal Spiral Stairs 2.06 DIVISION 06 --WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 2.07 DIVISION 07 --THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing B. 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation C. 07 41 13- Metal Roof Panels D. 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels ( E. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim F. 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.08 DIVISION 08 --OPENINGS A. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. 08 32 23 - Sliding/Folding Glazed Doors/Walls C. 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors D. 08 44 13 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls E. 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights F. 08 80 00 - Glazing G. 08 83 00 - Mirrors 2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies B. 09 30 00 - Tiling C. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring D. 09 68 00 - Carpeting E. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 14 00 - Signage B. 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories C. 10 31 00 - Manufactured Fireplaces D. 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties 2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT A. 11 31 00 - Residential Appliances 2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A. 12 35 30 - Residential Casework B. 12 36 00 - Countertops 2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING 2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL 2.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS 2.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK 2.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 2.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of the Work. B. Owner's occupancy. C. Contractor's use of site and general limitations. D. Definitions used throughout the Specification and Drawings. E. Specification formats and conventions. 1.02 PROJECT A. Project Name: 67th Ave Office. B. Owner's Name: Joe Green Investment Co. C. The Project consists of the alteration of an existing two story CMU and wood framed building. Work includes, but not limited to, a full interior renovation, expanded two story lobby, expanded 2nd floor area, entry canopy, full building reclad, exterior fountain and landscape wall.. 1.03 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in the Agreement. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. No Smoking Policy: Smoking is prohibited in Project Site. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. 1.06 DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General requirements for Delegated Design components are specified in Section 01 33 16. B. Specific design requirements are specified in Sections of Division 02 through 50. C. Delegated design may sometimes also be referred to as "Design-Build." Both terms may be used interchangeably and have the same meaning. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 1. Basic Contract Definitions: Contact Documents, Work, Project, Drawings, Specifications, Project Manual, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, Architect, Contract Time, Day, Substantial Completion, Contract Sum (or GMP), Change Order. 2. Basic contract definitions that are not defined in the General Conditions shall have the same meaning as defined in AIA Document A201 — 1997. B. "AHJ": Authority Having Jurisdiction as defined in AIA Document A201. C. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY D. "Delegated Design": Professional design service or certification specifically required of the Contractor in the Specifications. Such work is subject to provisions of AIA Document A201 § 3.12.10. The terms"Delegated Design,"and "Design-Build," mean the same thing and are used interchangeably. E. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,""selected," "approved," "required,"and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,""scheduled,"and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." G. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. H. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, connection to building systems, and similar operations. I. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations, complete and ready for the intended use. J. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. L. "Work": Project material "furnished"and "installed"complete and ready for the intended use. 1.08 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the CSI/CSC's MasterFormat 50-Division numbering system. B. Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications and Drawings. C. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. 3. The words"shall," "shall be,"or"shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Contract modification procedures. C. Additional architectural service for extraordinary contract administration. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Architect's Supplemental Instruction (ASI ): Minor change in Work directed by Architect. B. Proposal Request ( PR ): A formal request from Architect to Contractor for change in Contract Sum and Time required to perform a proposed change in Work. Proposal Request is not a directive to perform the proposed change. C. "Construction Change Directive" and "Change Order" have meanings defined in AIA Document A201. D. Additional Contract Administration Services: Architectural service to enforce Contract Documents resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with requirements or Contractor's request for accelerated procedures. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. F. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. H. See 1.04 Applications for Progress Payments for additional requirements. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Present required information in typewritten form. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. F. Additional contract administration services is an additional architectural service and will be billed to the Owner who will then back-charge the Contractor. G. Execute certification by notarized signature of authorized officer. H. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES I. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. J. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. K. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 30 00. 2. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01 30 00. 3. Project Record Documents as specified in Section 01 78 00, for review by Owner which will be returned to the Contractor. a. Alternative: Review Record Documents with Architect prior to submitting Application. 4. Preliminary Closeout Documents when specified in Section 01 78 00. L. Materials stored off site and included in the schedule of values for monthly payment application are to be stored in a bonded and secure facility. Copies of bill of sale for materials and certificate of insurance for material with Owner named as an insured are to be included with the payment application. M. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. B. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on an ASI. C. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue an CCB, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. D. Proposal Request: Architect may issue an PR which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 15 days. E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation . Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00. Contractor proposal will be processed in one of the following methods: 1. Architect may reject Contractor proposal or may return it for modification. 2. Architect may attach Contractor proposal to the Architect's CCB, complete the CCB appropriately, and distribute it for signatures. 3. Architect may accept Contractor's form that has place for signatures, sign it and distribute to Owner for signature. F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount shall be based on the fixed unit prices. G. Substantiation and Computation of Costs: Provide complete itemized cost information with substantiating backup for each item for evaluation as follows: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit on products and labor only. Overhead and profit is limited as follows: a. Entity performing work: 5% b. Upper tier contractor: 5% 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 6. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXTRAORDINARY CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION SERVICE A. Owner-Architect Agreement identifies certain additional services for which Architect may receive additional compensation. Some of these services may result out of actions or non-actions by Contractor; these include, but are not limited to: 1. Design services for modification resulting from substitution proposed by Contractor. 2. Review of submittals after the first re-submittal. 3. Review or response to unnecessary or frivolous RFI. 4. Second notification and review of non-compliant work. 5. Design services to correct or incorporate non-compliant work. 6. Design or engineering specified as Contractor's responsibility; for example, for design-build component or for performance-specified work. 7. Performing administrative work specified as Contractor's responsibility when Contractor refuses to perform after notification. 8. Performing administrative work specified as Contractor's responsibility when requested to expedite the Work. 9. Providing extra construction administration services after the specified date of Substantial Completion or the specified date of Final Completion when delay is not caused by Owner. 10. Re-inspection for Substantial Completion or Final Completion. B. Architect will issue Notice for Extraordinary Contract Administration Services to Owner and a copy to Contractor. Thereafter, Architect will record time and expense for each occurrence, or in the case of recurring occurrences, each type of occurrence. 1. Architect will, at their discretion, invoice Owner monthly for additional services. 2. Architect's fee schedule for additional services is included in Owner-Architect Agreement, and is available to Contractor upon request. C. Owner reserves the right to charge the cost of Architect's extraordinary contract administration service plus 10% administration cost to Contractor in an CCB or CO. 1.07 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Affidavit that payrolls and bills have been satisfied. 3. Consent of Surety to make Final Payment. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 4. Certificate evidencing that Builder's Risk linsurance required after Substantial Completion will remain in force, and a written statement that Contractor knows of no reason that insurance will not be renewed for the required period until Final Payment. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes procedure for coordinating and submitting Request for Interpretation. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor to Architect seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.03 RFI PROCEDURE A. Review Contract Documents and Project Site in a thorough and timely manner so Architect will have sufficient time to respond to RFI prior to execution of subject construction. 1. Claim for additional Time or Cost when RFI is answered within time limit specified in this Section will be rejected. B. Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. C. When possible, request interpretation at next Progress Meeting. Record Architect's response in meeting minutes. 1. When response is not given during meeting, submit RFI in approved format. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. RFI Form: Electronic form furnished by Architect, numbered and signed by Contractor. 1. Number each page of attachments with RFI number in lower right corner. 2. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 3. Alternative RFI Form: Subject to Architect's approval, Contractor software-generated form modified to match Architect's form. Numbering and attachments as specified in this Section. B. RFI Content: Include detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name and number. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Add revision numbers as decimal and digit. 6. RFI subject title, less than five words 7. Initiator of question 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state anticipated impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. 14. Single discipline per RFI: Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical or Electrical 15. Space for reply on same page, if possible. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION C. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B or approved form. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Instrument of Change, Construction Change Directive, or Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.05 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 5 business days for Architect's response for each RFI; and additional 5 business days for consultant review. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. Failure to allow specified response time will not be cause for an extension of Contract Time or additional cost. 2. Architect's goal will be to return RFI as quickly as possible. However, quick response is not guaranteed. 3. The following RFIs are defined as frivolous and will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for information derived from activities assigned to Contractor in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for approval of adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. h. Questions relating to construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures or safety precautions. (These are Contractor's responsibility exclusively.) i. Questions relating to construction schedule, coordination between trades, or division of work among subcontractors. (These are also Contractor's responsibility exclusively.) 4. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 5. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Contract Modification Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. b. Do not proceed with this work until Change Order is executed. B. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 5 days if Contractor disagrees with response. C. Frivolous RFI: Architect may claim compensation for cost of Architect's time and materials as a result of unnecessary or frivolous RFIs. Compensation will be assessed to Contractor in accordance with Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall strive to keep the number of RFIs to a minimum. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION 1. Prior to submitting RFI, carefully study Contract Documents to assure that requested information is not already available. RFIs that request information available in the Contract Documents will be considered frivolous. B. RFI is not a substitute for Shop Drawing. When multiple RFIs are submitted for related work, Architect may require a Shop Drawing. C. RFI submitted by Fax is not acceptable. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project coordination. B. Communication with Architect. C. Coordination Drawings. D. Pre-construction meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Pre-installation meetings. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Pre-Construction Meeting Submittals: Bonds, insurance, schedule of values, project personnel directory, subcontractor and supplier list, and other lists; specified in other Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. C. Minutes of meetings required in this Section. D. Coordinated Ceiling Drawings: Submit within 60 days of Notice to Proceed. Submit 1 set of color plots or color copies on white bond paper. Transmit CADD files. 1. Architect will review, stamp and return one copy with comments within 14 days after receipt. Procedure requirements for Shop Drawings in Section 01 33 00 apply. 2. Architect's review is for compliance with design intent and does not relieve Contractor of coordination and performance requirements. 3. Copy reviewed drawings and distribute to appropriate entities. 1.04 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations specified in different Sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate portions of work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. In the event of an inconsistency in the Drawings or between the Drawings and the Specifications, unless otherwise ordered in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall provide the greater quantity and/or better quality of work. C. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than Project Drawings. 3. Media: CADD electronic"dwg"files unless other media is approved by Architect. 1.05 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION A. Communication to Architect: High speed internet based digital, except Submittals specified in Section 01 33 00. 1. Telephone communication is acceptable for initial or simple issues. 2. Follow up telephone communication in writing. B. Correspondence: 1. correspondence by FAX is not acceptable unless specifically approved. 2. Any information that is disseminated shall retain the original scale and aspect from the original as published by Architect. 1.06 COORDINATED CEILING DRAWINGS A. Content and View: Two views, concealed conditions and visually exposed conditions, shown as reflected plans. Indicate actual size of components at scale sufficient to show no interference and adequate space for installation and maintenance of each component. 1. Concealed Conditions View: Including, but not limited to: mechanical systems (plumbing, ductwork, HVAC Equipment, piping, controls, fire protection systems, etc.); electrical systems (wiring, raceway, conduit, cable trays, controls, fire and life safety systems, lighting, alarm devices, etc.); structural elements (beams, girders, etc); acoustical systems, ceiling equipment supports. 2. Exposed Conditions View: Including, but not limited to: mechanical; electrical; structural elements as noted above; acoustical systems; lights— pendants, surface and recessed; exit signage; directional signage; conduit; grilles; diffusers; damper actuators; sprinkler heads/type, speaker locations, access panels with sizes indicated, smoke detectors and alarm devices, and any other item or element that will be seen when looking at the ceiling. B. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. C. Congested Areas: Provide more detailed plan and either vertical sections or 3-dimensional CADD model. D. Media: CADD plans, sections, and models for color plotting; ".dwg"file format. E. Show the following in different colors for each system: structure, HVAC, plumbing, piping, electrical, fire protection, other work. F. Distribute Coordinated Ceiling Drawings among affected entities for review. Resolve conflicts and incorporate corrections into drawings prior to submitting to Architect. 1. Work that is not included in Coordinated Ceiling Drawings shall be coordinated and installed without conflicts or defects, and without change in Time or Cost. 1.07 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner/Architect will schedule meeting after Notice to proceed. B. Meeting location shall be on site. C. Attendance Required: Owner, Owner's project manager, Architect and Contractor. D. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 4. Submission of complete list of Subcontractors, with contact information, list of products, schedule of values, submittal schedule, and construction progress schedule with any critical path work sequencing and long lead time materials. 5. Designation of key personnel representing parties in Contract, Owner and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, RFIs, requests for applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Construction site access: pick-up, delivery, and parking; temporary facilities and controls, security, safety, and restrictions. 8. Scheduling activities of Testing Agent. 9. Progress cleaning. 10. Anticipated building service or system interuptions, and impact to building operations/occupants. E. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants, with one original copy to Architect, Owner and those affected by decisions made. 1.08 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals. 1. Architect may elect to attend by telephone conference call. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, or Owner's representative,Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. Architect shall attend in person or via conference call at Architect's discretion. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status, RFIs and status, and proposal requests/change orders and status. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of construction progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants, with one(1)original copy to Architect, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meeting at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section. B. Work undertaken or completed without convening a pre-installation meeting shall be subject to removal, inspection,testing, observation, etc at the Architect's discretion without additional compensation to Contractor in time or money. Work required as a result of removal, inspection, testing, observation, etc., even though determined to be satisfactory, shall be provided without additional compensation to the contractor in time or money. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS C. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section including the Architect, Owner, Design Engineer, manufacturer (representative and technical support)and key personnel of the installation team. D. Notify Architect seven (7)days in advance of meeting date. E. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. F. Record minutes and distribute copies within four(4)days after meeting to participants, with one original copy to Architect, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal control report and submittal procedure. B. Proposed products list. C. Product data. D. Sustainable building data. E. Shop drawings. F. Samples. G. Design data. H. Test reports. I. Certificates. J. Manufacturer's instructions. K. Manufacturer's field reports. L. Construction photographs. 1.02 SUBMITTAL CONTROL REPORT A. Prepare and maintain a separate material delivery log to monitor submittals required by the contract documents. Show: 1. Work item number corresponding to the specification section and construction schedule. 2. Contractor, subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or supplier responsible for each work item. 3. Narrative description of the work item. 4. Number of days required for preparation of the submittal. 5. Date submittal due. 6. Number of days allowed for approval. 7. Date approval due. 8. Number of days required to fabricate and deliver item to the Contractor. 9. Date of delivery. 10. Date item required to be installed, corresponding to the construction schedule. B. Distribution: 1. Distribution copies of reviewed schedule to: Architect, Owner's Representative. 2. Instruct recipients to report any inability to comply and provide detailed explanation with suggested remedies. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Organize and submit complete information into separate submittals for each Specification Section listed in Table of Contents, electronically in editable PDF format, except as follows: 1. One (1)consolidated Division submittal for Sections in the following Divisions: a. Division 21, 22, and 23. b. Division 26, 27 and 28. c. Division 31, 32, and 33, except One (1)separate consolidated submittal for Landscaping is acceptable. 2. Doors, door frames and door hardware: One (1)consolidated submittal. 3. Exterior curtainwall, storefront and entrance systems: One (1)consolidated submittal. 4. Exceptions must be approved by Architect. B. Number submittals sequentially,followed by specification Section number. 1. Revisions:Add "R-1"to submittal number; example"034-08 51 13 R-1". C. Transmittal or Cover Sheet: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. Transmittal Form: Use CSI Form 12.1A. 2. Incomplete transmittal form will be returned. D. Contractor's Review: Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required,field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 1. Review submittals prior to submission and provide stamp of approval signed or initialed by Contractor. a. Contractor's review indicates that Contractor has thoroughly reviewed the submittal and certifies that it is complete, correct, in compliance with the Contract Documents, and suitable for the Project. b. Review represents that field measurements and field conditions have been considered and that the work submitted will perform as intended. c. Review of Shop Drawing represents that required coordination with other work has been performed and is indicated in Shop Drawing. 2. Architect will not review submittals that do not include Contractor's signed review stamp, do not include required field conditions, or are not accurate. 3. Include written description and graphic demarcation of deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. 4. All work done prior to approval of submittals shall be at the Contractor's risk. E. Clearly indicate all options, colors, accessories, data, etc, provided for this Project. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents. Identify product limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. G. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps. H. Schedule submittals to expedite Project. Send electronic submittals to Architect at SERA Architects. Coordinate submission of related items. 1. Send one copy to Owner I. For each submittal, allow 14 days from time Architect recieves electronic submittal. 1. Allow additional 7 days for any one of the following submittals: a. Major building components or consolidated submittals. b. Review by Architect's consultant. c. Review by Commissioning Agent. d. Review by Owner. J. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. Provide product data whether specified or not specified in Section. 2. If information that must be specially prepared for submittal because standard data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 3. Each submittal must show which product(s)and options are applicable to this Project. B. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Manufacturer's product specifications. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Standard color charts. 5. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 6. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 7. Printed performance curves. 8. Operational range diagrams. 9. Mill reports. 10. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. 11. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 12. Testing by recognized testing agency. 13. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 14. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Mark submittals to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Submit one electronic copy in editable PDF format. F. Architect will return a reviewed electronic copy in PDF format. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on standard printed data or reproductions of the Contract Documents, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is permitted. 1. Provide Shop Drawings for work indicated in Sections and when needed to execute the Work. B. Electronic copy of Architect's CADD drawings (floor plans, site plan and ceiling plans, only)will not be provided. C. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Dimensions. 2. Three dimensional axonometric views of flashings, pans and sheet metal details. 3. Identification of products. 4. Fabrication and installation drawings. 5. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 6. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. 7. manufacturing instructions. 8. Templates and patterns. 9. Schedules. 10. Design calculations. 11. Compliance with specified standards. 12. Notation of coordination requirements. 13. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 14. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 15. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 16. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Submit copies or transparencies as follows: 1. 8.5 by 11 inch or 11 by 17 inch size: Submit 4 copies on bond paper. 2. Larger than 11 by 17 inches: Submit 4 copies on bond paper. 3. Submit 1 additional copy for Architect's consultant's review. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. B. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. C. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. 3. Sample source. 4. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. D. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 1. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. 2. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit 2 manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. F. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 1. Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 2. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 3. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. G. Finishes, products and/or materials noted as custom, hand worked, etc shall be submitted to Architect for review and approval prior to fabrication/installation. Allow for minor revisions to sample in terms of finish, fabrication, installation and/or sequencing. H. Field Samples: Large size samples and assembled samples that shall be submitted at the Project Site are specified in individual Sections. 1.07 DESIGN DATA A. Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. B. Submit for Architect's information. 1. Architect's review is limited to assessing conformance with design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C. Refer to Section 01 33 16 - Delegated Design Procedures. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.08 TEST REPORTS A. Submit for Architect's knowledge. B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.09 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.10 QUALIFICATION DATA A. When specified in individual specification sections or requested by Architect, submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, or subcontractor. B. Data may include previous experience, list of previous similar projects, references, proof of training, and approval by manufacturer or warrantor. 1.11 SAMPLE WARRANTY A. When warranty is specified in a Section, submit sample of specified warranty with initial product submittal. B. Final warranty submittal is specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS A. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.14 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work. B. Each month submit photographs with Application for Payment. C. Photographs: Digital camera, 3.5 mega pixel minimum. D. Take one (1) site photograph from same direction indicating relative progress of the Work. E. Deliver digital copies to Owner on approved media (CD, DVD)with project record documents. Catalog and index files in chronological sequence; include word processor table of contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of Delegated Design portion of Work. B. Permitting for Delegated Design portion of Work. C. Delegated Design submittals. D. Coordinate and assume full responsibility for design, engineering, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of this work. 1.02 DELEGATED DESIGN SUMMARY A. Delegated Design portions include the following: 1. Temporary shoring and supports for excavation, concrete, walls and other construction. 2. Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete, Concrete formwork and mix design. 3. Section 05 51 00-Metal Stairs. 4. Section 05 52 13- Pipe and Tube Railings 5. Section 05 71 13- Fabricated Metal Spiral Stairs 6. Section 06 17 33-Wood I-Joists 7. Section 07 42 13-Metal Wall Panels; for furring system and panel attachment to structure. 8. Section 07 43 42 -Composite Wall Panels; Composite panels and supports 9. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim; 10. Section 08 44 13-Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls. 11. Section 08 80 00-Glazing, for glass strength. 12. Section 09 21 16-Gypsum Board Assemblies; For non-structural metal-framed interior partitions, gypsum board ceiling suspension systems and perimeter requirements, and seismic bracing. 13. Divisions 22 and 23 -seismic restraint of systems. 14. Mechanical work including plumbing systems, HVAC and controls, Division 22 and 23. 15. Electrical work including power, lighting,fire alarm, building controls, security, data and communications, Division 26, 27 and 28. 16. Divisions 26, 27 and 28-seismic restraint of systems. 17. See structural notes for other delegated design items. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Delegated Design: Professional design service or certification specifically required of the Contractor in the Specifications. B. AHJ: Authorities Having Jurisdiction, defined in Section 01 10 00 and AIA Document A201. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Regulations. B. Provide complete, operational systems that perform their intended use. C. Engineer Delegated Design portions for gravity, lateral and seismic loads. 1. Load criteria is indicated in Structural Drawings. If not indicated, request criteria. 2. Indicate reactions to structure. 3. Provide services of a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction. D. Calculate and complete energy forms required by AHJ. E. Execute the design intent as indicated in Project Drawings and Specifications. F. Obtain Permits and inspections and pay fees required by AHJ. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES 1.05 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will not pay for progress delays, additional Work, additional products, restocking, or re-working required by Contractor's failure to coordinate Delegated Design work with other Project work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Design: Submit to Architect drawings and product data that describe Contractor's design prior to performing engineering calculations and Shop Drawings. 1. Architect will evaluate proposed design and comment on conformance with intent of Contract Documents. 2. Preliminary review is for aesthetic and general function concerns and will not constitute approval of engineering. 3. Purpose of this submittal is to avoid engineering and detailing an unacceptable proposal. B. Permit Review: Submit Delegated Design documents to AHJ for review and approval. 1. When AHJ requires review by Architect or Architect's consultant, allow 10 days for Architect's review. Submit documents to Architect and pick-up documents when review is complete. Make corrections noted by Architect. 2. Obtain permits prior to executing work component. 3. Comply with AHJ requirements. 4. Execute corrections to Delegated Design work required by AHJ at no cost to Owner and prior to Substantial Completion. a. Notify Architect of changes required by AHJ as soon as they are known. 5. Include design criteria, design assumptions, structural calculations, fabrication and construction details, required clearances, and interface requirements. a. Delegated Design drawings are in addition to Shop Drawings. 6. Affix Design Professional's seal for State License on Submittals. C. Engineer's qualifications. D. Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 for each product of Delegated Design portion of work. Product submittals are in addition to submittals for permit and design data. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Documentation: Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Drawing System, NCS/UDS published by National Institute of Building Sciences. 2. Minimum text size: 1/8 inch 3. Legible when microfilmed 4. Other requirements of AHJ B. Design requirements specific to Delegated Design portions are indicated in Drawings and in Sections that specify the component. C. Engineer's Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. D. Pre-Submittal Meeting: Contractor shall meet with Architect, Consultant, and Delegated Designer to discuss requirements of work-portion, submittals, scheduling and sequencing. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule design process and submittals required for Delegated Design portions to fit within Construction Schedule. B. Allow adequate time for AHJ review. Contact AHJ for time estimate and coordination of schedule. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 33 16 DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES C. If Architect's approval of Shop Drawings is required prior to application for permit, schedule and sequence Shop Drawing review prior to review of permit submittal. Allow time specified in Section 01 33 00. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Mock-up. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Manufacturers'field services. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008. B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2013a. C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012. D. ASTM D3740- Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. E. ASTM E329- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection; 2013c. F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mock-Up: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mock-ups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. 1. Approved mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mock-up: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 10 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. When copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 2. When copies of standards are needed for any reason, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. 1. ADAAG or ADAAmericans with Disabilities Act 2. CFRCode of Federal Regulations 3. DODDepartment of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 4. FSFederal Specification 5. MILSPECMilitary Specification and Standards 6. UFASUniform Federal Accessibility Standards E. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." 1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 14. Distribution: Contractor, Architect, Engineer of Record, Authority Having Jurisdition, Owner (verify), and Construction Manager (when appropriate). B. Deficiencies Report: Attach a separate list of deficiencies identified in previous reports that have not been corrected and successfully retested. 1. Submit a final report certifying the status of all deficiencies, signed and stamped. Submit report directly to Authority having jurisdiction (when required)and copy to others. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 1.07 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of applicable reference code(s)enforced by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Obtain copies of standards and where required by product specification sections. E. Maintain copies of standards and codes at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. F. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. G. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. 1. Owner's testing agent will perform "special inspections" required by Regulations. B. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other testing and inspection specified as Contractor's responsibility or required by Contractor for quality control. C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. D. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 1. Design anchorage and attachments to resist seismic forces when required by Regulations. 3.02 MOCK-UP A. Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mock-up for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mock-up in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-up will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-up before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of mock-up. 5. Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. B. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, fleshings, seals, and finishes. D. Accepted mock-up shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. 1. Deconstruct and recycle mock-up that is not incorporated in Work. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Project identification sign. I. Field offices. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Existing facilities may not be used. C. New permanent facilities may be used. D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.07 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.09 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Performance bond. E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4355- Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007. B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2009). C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011. D. ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 2008. E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2012. F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Also comply with all more stringent requirements of State of Oregon Erosion and Sedimentation Control Manual. B. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. C. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. 1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations. D. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. E. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. F. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. G. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. I. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. J. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. L. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover. 2. Include: a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage. b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures. c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures. d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also included. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner. C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Use one of the following: 1. Erosion control matting or netting. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U-or T-section,with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible;fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec"-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. G. Gravel: See Section 32 11 23 for aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. 2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following: a. Four nails per post with 3/4 inch diameter flat or button head, 1 inch long, and 14 gage, 0.083 inch shank diameter. b. Five staples per post with at least 17 gage, 0.0453 inch wire, 3/4 inch crown width and 1/2 inch long legs. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. D. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy. C. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D5197 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other Carbonyl Compounds in Air(Active Sampler Methodology); 2009. B. CAL (CDPHSM)-Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Environmental Chambers; State of California Department of Public Health; v1.1, 2010. C. EPA 600/4-90/010 -Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air; April 1990. D. EPA 625/R-96/010b - Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air; January 1999. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality. D. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. E. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. B. Air Contaminant Test Method: US EPA Environmental Section 01445 - Testing for Indoor Air Quality, Baseline IAQ and Materials, www.epa.gov/rtp/new-bldg/environmental/s-01445.htm. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. D. HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum. 2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation. E. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. F. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. G. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. H. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. 3.02 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy. C. Do not start flush-out until: 1. All construction is complete including interior finishes; at Substantial Completion. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary. 4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing. 3.03 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy. C. Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Air Contaminant Concentration Determination and Limits: Conform to US EPA Environmental Section 01445 -Testing for Indoor Air Quality, Baseling IAQ and Materials, www.epa.gov/rtp/new-bldg/environmental/s-01445.htm. E. Analyze air samples and submit report. F. Air Contaminant Concentration Limits: 1. Formaldehyde: Not more than 27 parts per billion. 2. PM10 Particulates: Not more than 50 micrograms per cubic meter. 3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOCs): Not more than 500 micrograms per cubic meter. 4. Chemicals Listed in CAL CDPH Standard Method Table 4-1, except formaldehyde: Allowable concentrations listed in Table 4-1. 5. Carbon Monoxide: Not more than 9 parts per million and not more than 2 parts per million higher than outdoor air. G. Air Contaminant Concentration Test Methods: 1. Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, EPA 625 Method TO-11A, or EPA 600 Method IP-6. 2. Particulates: EPA 600 Method IP-10. 3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17; or EPA 600 Method IP-1. 4. Chemicals Listed in CAL CDPH Standard Method Table 4-1, except formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, or EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17. 5. Carbon Monoxide: EPA 600 Method IP-3, plus measure outdoor air; measure in ppm; report both indoor and outdoor measurements. 6. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PCH): Not more than 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter. 7. Regulated Pollutants: Measure in relation to outside air; not more than contained in outside air. H. If air samples show concentrations higher than those specified, ventilate with 100 percent outside air and retest at no cost to Owner, or conduct full building flush-out specified above. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. B. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. C. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or reused from other projects are not considered new products. D. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. E. Substitutions: Contractor proposed changes in products, materials, equipment, or methods of construction different from those required by the Contract Documents. F. VOC: Volatile organic compound, carbon compounds that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions and vaporize at normal room temperature. Measure as grams per liter, less water. G. Bidding/ Negotiating Period: The period within the project schedule where the Contractor receives bids or pricing from subcontracts or prepares their own bid to establish a contract value with the Owner. H. Award of Contract: The formal acceptance of the terms of the negotiation by the Contractor. I. Notice to Proceed: A document that establishes the date work is authorized to commence. It may also include the number of calendar days or date of substantial completion. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal procedure for Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, and Certificates is specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedure. B. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. C. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Request for Substitution: Submit approved form with supporting information to CM/GC. Comply with "Substitution Procedures"Article in this Section. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1. Requests During Bidding/ Negotiating period: CSI Form 1.5C or current CSI Northwest Region Form. 2. Requests after Bidding/Negotiating period: CSI Form 13.1A. 3. Submit original request forms in quantity required distribution. Original must be signed by person authorized to certify the substitution request form. Architect may request proof of authorization. E. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment salvaged and refurbished as specified. 1. Protect, repair and prepare for installation items indicated as"reinstall" or"salvage for reinstallation'. 2. Replace items that are damaged beyond repair during demolition or construction. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Urea-Formaldehyde Prohibition: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide composite wood and agrifiber products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins. Laminating adhesives used to fabricate both on-site and Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber assemblies shall not contain urea formaldehyde resin. a. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content. 2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. D. Adhesives and Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168, and Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36. 1. Specific Product Categories: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Indoor Carpet Adhesive: 50. b. Carpet Pad Adhesive: 50. c. Wood Flooring Adhesive:100. d. Rubber Flooring Adhesive:60. e. Subfloor Adhesive:50. f. Ceramic Tile Adhesive:65. g. VCT and Asphalt Adhesive:50. h. Gypsum Board Adhesive:50. i. Resilient Base Adhesive:50. j. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: 70. k. Structural Glazing Adhesive:100. 2. Specialty Applications: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. PVC Welding:510. b. CPVC Welding:490. c. ABS Welding:325. d. Plastic Cement Welding:250. e. Adhesive Primer for Plastic:550. f. Contact Adhesive:80. g. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive:250. h. Structural Wood Member Adhesive:140 i. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Operations: 850. j. Top and Trim Adhesive:250. 3. Substrate Specific Applications: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Metal to Metal:30. b. Plastic Foams:50. c. Porous Material (except wood)50. d. Wood30. e. Fiberglass80. 4. Sealants: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Architectura1250. b. Roof300. c. Roadway250. d. Single Ply Roof Membrane450. e. Other250. 5. Primers for Sealants: VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed: a. Architectural Non Porous250. b. Architectural Porous775. c. Other750. 6. Aerosol Adhesives: Percent VOC by weight shall not exceed: a. General Purpose Mist Spray:65%. b. General Purpose Web Spray:55%. c. Special Purpose (all types):70%. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS E. Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)content than required by Green Seal Standards GS-11 and GC-03, SCAQMB Rule 1113, in grams/Liter as follows: 1. VOC in grams/Liter shall not exceed the following for each product: a. Non-flat opaque products:150. b. Flat opaque products: 50. c. Anti-corrosive paint:250. d. Floor coating:100. e. Clear varnish: 350. f. Sanding sealer: 275. g. sealer:250. h. Other sealers:200. i. Stains:250. j. Lacquer:Not allowed. 2. Comply with other requirements of GS-11 (component limitations, scrubbability, hiding power, washability). F. Carpet, Carpet Tile, Carpet Cushion and Adhesives: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus Testing Program Limits, Emission Factor Limit in mg/sq.. m. x hour as follows: 1. Total Carpet or Carpet Tile VOC: 0.50 a. 4-Phenylcyclohexene: 0.05 b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 c. Styrene: 0.40 d. Green Label Plus testing for Acetaldehyde, Benzene, Caprolactam, 2-Ethylhexanoic Acid, Formaldehyde, 1-Methyl-2-Pyrrolidinone, Naphthalene, Nonanal, Octanal, 4- Phenylcyclohexene, Styrene, Toluene, and Vinyl Acetate. 2. Total Adhesive VOC: 10.00 a. Formaldehyde: 0.05 b. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 3. Total Cushion VOC: 1.00 a. 4-Phenylcyclohexene: 0.05 b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 c. BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene):0.30 G. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. H. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. I. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. D. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions"Article for proposal of product. F. Visual Selection Specification: Selection of products for color, pattern, density, or texture will be by Architect from Manufacturer's full range, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures"or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered during construction when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 1. Note any departures from the Contract Documents or changes in previously reviewed submittals which were not commented upon in the initial review of information. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Where "visual matching" is not possible, paragraph 2.3E. 6. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. 7. Will reimburse the Architect for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and additional Construction Administration services as a result of the proposed substitution. E. Conditions for Substitution after Bidding/ Negotiating Period: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results including warranty, maintenance service or source replacement of parts. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule or the work of other trades. 5. Requested substitution will not require changing specifications or affect the Owner's activities. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. The Contractor agrees to reschedule activities around the required redesign time needed without changing Substantial Completion date and reimburse Architect for changes to the building design, including design, detailing and additional Construction Administration services as a result of the proposed substitution. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 1. Submit proposed substitution 14 days prior to submittal. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Requests during Procurement (Bidding): Specified in Procurement Documents. 4. Requests after Bidding/ Negotiating Period : Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS (CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in a manner to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Cutting and patching. D. Laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Starting of systems and equipment. G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. H. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations for bracing and shoring. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. C. Cutting and Patching: If not shown in Documents, submitt an RFI in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. D. Substantial Completion Documents: Statement that Project is substantially complete and list of incomplete items (Punch List). 1. 1 copy. 2. Other items listed under Substantial Completion in Part 3. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate to be kept on file in Contractor's office. C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property, as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. E. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations, as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). F. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, proceed as follows: a. Notify Architect before proceeding if proposed repair will have aesthetic effect. b. Repair or replace damaged mechanical or electrical work compliant with Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28. c. Patch finish to match adjacent surfaces. H. Clean existing systems and equipment. I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. D. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. F. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. 1. Do not overcut at corners of masonry, concrete, metals and similar rigid materials. H. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. I. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. J. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element. K. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. L. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. M. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and will not damage the Work. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Substantial Completion: Submit written statement that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. b. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. c. Include the following information at the top of each page: Project name; Date; Name of Architect; Name of Contractor; Page number. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction digital photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Certificate of Substantial Completion: On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Re-inspection is Extraordinary Contract Administration Service, Section 01 20 00. 3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirement for Final Completion. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. F. Notify Architect when work is ready for Final Completion. 1. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 5. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. G. Final Completion: On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will certify a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of work that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Re-inspection is Extraordinary Contract Administration Service, Section 01 20 00. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing for use options. 6. Concrete: May be crushed and used as riprap, aggregate, sub-base material, or fill. 7. Bricks: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as landscape cover, sub-base material, or fill. 8. Concrete masonry units: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as sub-base material or fill. 9. Asphalt paving: May be recycled into paving for project. 10. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 11. Glass. 12. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 13. Plastic buckets. 14. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and removed: DuPont (http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com) conduct reclamation programs. 15. Asphalt roofing shingles. 16. Paint. 17. Plastic sheeting. 18. Rigid foam insulation. 19. Windows, doors, and door hardware. 20. Plumbing fixtures. 21. Mechanical and electrical equipment. 22. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs). 23. Acoustical ceiling tile and panels. E. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. 5. Incineration, either on-or off-site. F. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. E. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Handling and disposal of land clearing debris. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Material Recovery Facility: Waste sorting facility where commingled materials are accepted and recovered for recycling or salvage. E. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. F. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. G. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. I. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. J. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. K. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. L. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. M. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. N. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. O. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. P. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. Q. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual at partial completion. C. Warranties (and Bonds) Manual. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit one copy of preliminary manual before 75% of Work is complete. Include table of contents, outline contents of each section, and at least one typical finish section complete, and one equipment section complete. Architect will review preliminary and return one copy with comments. a. Applications for payment equal to and greater than 75% will not be certified until preliminary manual is submitted. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to Substantial Completion. This copy will be reviewed and returned , with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after request for final payment or request for final inspection, whichever is first. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. Items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. 1. Review current information with Architect prior to each Application for Payment. This is a condition for payment. See Section 01200 E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA -GENERAL A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 1. Multiple Volumes: Divide 0 & M information logically following CSI MasterFormat when more than one binder is necessary. 2. Subtitle binders by Volume Number and CSI sub group title or CSI division title as appropriate. D. Cover: Identify each binder with printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify Subtitle appropriate for subject matter of contents, Month and Year of Substantial Completion. E. Table of Contents: Project name on each page; list products and systems included in Volume, indexed by CSI Section number. F. Information Page: Project name; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect , Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; date of substantial completion. G. Index of Products: Table that can be sorted by word processor or spreadsheet; printed and digital formats; include product information under the following column headings: 1. Product Name 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. O&M Volume Number 5. Section Number H. Arrange content by systems under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product or system, with Specification Section number and product name. 1. Product Summary: On divider page or a separate first page indicate Specification Section number and title, product or system name, manufacturer, model, major components, supplier and installer information. J. Text: Manufacturer's printed or typewritten information on 20 pound paper. K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS MANUAL A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Always provide, at a minimum, the responsible Subcontractor's, supplier's and manufacturer's standard product warranty unless noted otherwise in the individual specification sections. 2. All listed manufacturers and all listed installers through the act of submitting a bid are confirming obligatory responsibility for providing an equal quantity and equal quality warranty to the design basis warranties listed, unless individual specification sections note otherwise. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. 1. Do not include "And Bonds"when Project does not include bonds. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1. Protect and Existing to Remain have the same meaning regarding work in this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 8 years of documented experience. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. B. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS --NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION 10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. 3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete building frame members. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007). D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2013. G. ASTM C33/C33M -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. H. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013. I. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. J. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2012. K. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. L. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012. M. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. N. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a (Reapproved 2013). O. ASTM E1643-Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. P. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. Q. ASTM F1249-01 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Steel. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. C. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A-Water Reducing, Type C -Accelerating, Type G -Water Reducing, and High Range and Retarding. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Water and Soil Gases Vapor Barrier: 1. Performance Requirements: Minimum 15-mil thick polyolefin geomembrane, that is stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs, and in conformance with the following requirements: a. Vapor Barrier: 1) Comply with ASTM E 1745. 2) Meets or exceed Class A. b. Water Vapor Tansmission Rate: 1) Comply with ASTM E 96. 2) 0.006 gr/ft2/hr. or lower. c. Permeance Rating: 1) Comply with ASTM F 1249/ASTM E 96. 2) 0.0123 Perms or lower. d. Puncture Resistance: 1) Comply with ASTM E 1745. 2) Minimum 2200 grams. e. Tensil Strength: 1) Comply with ASTM E 1745. 2) Minimum 45.0 lbf/in. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Manufacturers: Design Basis Product, subject to compliance with requirements, provide underslab water and soil gases vapor barrier by Stego Industries, LLC. Manufacturers providing comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fortifiber Corporation, www.fortifiber.com; Product: Moistop Ultra 15.X b. Insulation Solutions, Inc; www.insulationsolutions.com; Viper VaporCheck II, 15 mil. c. Poly-America, Inc; www.yellowguard.com <http://www.yellowguard.com>; Product: 15 mil Yellow Guard. d. Raven Industries Inc, www.ravenind.com; Vapor Block 15 e. W. R. Meadows, Inc., www.wrmeadows.com; Product: PERMINATOR, 15 mil. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 3. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc.,necesary for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier. B. Vapor Emission Control Sealer:and pH Suppression: Two-component high solids penetrating epoxy sealer for providing an effective membrane barrier to inhibit moisture migration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ardex b. Advanced Moisture Control c. Aquafin d. Bostik e. Dependable Floor Underlayments f. Mapei C. ASTM F-2170-02 (Relative Humidity Probe Test) = Below 80% D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. B. Hold-downs: Delegated design hold-downs complying with loading requirements indicated on structural drawings. 1. Manufacturers: a. Simpson Strong-Tie b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A. 1. Application: Use at slab-on-grade. 2. Vehicle: Solvent-based. 3. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum. 4. VOC Content: OTC compliant. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. C. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Cement Content: Minimum lb per cubic yard. 4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 2.09 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify underslab utilities, soil gas venting systems, and vapor barriers are in place, with required special inspections completed prior placing of on grade slabs. 3.02 FORMWORK A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design, fabricate, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure is cured and can support such loads prior to form removal, so forms may be removed without damage to concrete. B. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar and so that concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces at interior or exterior exposed to view concrete surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inchfor utility and parking garage formed finished surfaces. 3. Class D, up to 1 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces hidden from view. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. K. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits,joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.04 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318, and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.05 VAPOR BARRIER A. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install underslab water and soil gases vapor barrier per manufacturer's recommendations and building code requirements, under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor barrier before covering. B. Plastic Vapor Barrier: Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.07 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. C. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. E. Adjust mix as required to maintain specified air content at the point of discharge. F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. G. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. H. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.09 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent or roughen interface to 1/4" (6mm)amplitude at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 3.10 WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm.. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress o fthe Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install per manufacturer's recommendations 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface to tolerances indicated. C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces indicated. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances. B. Screed slab-on-grade floors level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. Verify finish with Architect. 1. Non-critical areas, thickset tile and parking structures: a. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 20; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 15. b. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 15; Minimum Localized Value (MLV)of 10. 2. Carpet areas: a. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17. b. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 17; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 15 3. Thinset Flooring: a. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 35; Minimum Localized Value (MLV)of 30. b. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 30; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 20. 4. Polished Concrete Flooring: a. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 50; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 35. b. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV)of 30; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 20. C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours. 3.14 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft./h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 9 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of a floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. F. General: Where structural slabs will be polished and exposed to view, protect structural concrete slab finished surface from surface damage and staining resulting from construction activities by utilizing appropriate membrane and sheet materials and other such measures as may be necessary to protect the finished slab surface appearance such as, but not limited to, diapering of equipment to eliminate oil leaks, and restricting construction activities that could be potentially detrimental to exposed to view slab finished surfaces. Protect concrete surfaces to receive polished finish: 1. Moist cure for a minimum of 10 days before covering with protection board. 2. Use Ram Board as protection board, with additional plywood during setting of steel. Do not use Masonite, hardboard. 3. Do not use staining snap lines. Use blue only. 4. Not Used. 5. Wet cure only, concrete slabs. 6. Slab curing temperature is to remain below 120 degrees F where radiant heating/cooling system plastic piping is integral with slab. 7. Forming and bracing must remain in place for support of structural slab until slab has come up to full strength. 8. Allow slabs to adequately cure to eliminate possibility of discoloring slab surface and silhouetting of protect board onto concrete finish surface. Hardboard may not be used as a protection board. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 10 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm)to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm)or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 11 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests, and inspections and to submit test reports C. Inspections: As indicated in the General Structural Notes. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 150 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day and at least one composite sample for each 5000 square feet of surface area of slabs or walls. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Prior to finish flooring surfaces being installed, the relative humidity of the concrete slab shall meet the requirements of the flooring manufacturer or 80 percent, whichever is less, per ASTM F-2170-02 (Relative Humidity Probe Test). 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days, two at 28 days, and hold one for later testing. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete manufacturer, Building Official, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests, and air content. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 12 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.17 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 35 13 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finishing slabs on grade and monolithic floor slabs. B. Surface treatment for polished concrete floor system on existing interior concrete floors by bonded abrasive dry grinding. C. Application of concrete densifier, and polishing with metal-bonded and resin-bonded diamond tools to specified minimum gloss values. D. Application of penetrating concrete protective sealer. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish. B. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices. C. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. B. ACI 302.1R- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (Errata 2007) . C. ANSI/NFSI B101.3-Test Method for Measuring Wet D. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2006. E. ASTM C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces F. ASTM C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. G. ASTM D1014 - Standard Practice for Conducting Exterior Exposure Tests of Paints and Coatings on Metal Substrates; 2009. H. ASTM D2370 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings; 1998 (Reapproved 2002). I. ASTM D2794 -Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact); 1993 (Reapproved 2004). J. ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser; 2010. K. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2009. L. ASTM D4587 - Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings; 2005. M. ASTM E430— Standard Test Method for Gloss Measurement N. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). O. NFSA— National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, concrete finishes technical data sheets giving descriptive data, curing time, and application requirements. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 35 13 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Provide manufacturer's recommended equipment and chemical product data sheets for each application, including but not limited to: 1. Planetary grinder polishing equipment 2. Planetary grinder three-phase dust collection equipment 3. Hand Tools 4. Hand tool dust collection equipment 5. Diamond tooling 6. High speed propane burnisher 7. Polyurea pump 8. Joint cutting saw 9. Liquid reactive surface densifier 10. Grout Coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment 11. Liquid stain guard treatment 12. Joint filler C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impact food quality. C. Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs)for Buildings and Facilities, Final Guidelines, revisions and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces. D. Applicator/Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer Certification: Installers shall be certified either through CPAA Certification or through manufacturer's certification program by completing training in proper application and use of polishing machinery, diamond tooling, grout coating, liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard. 2. Installer Experience: Company specializing in performing Work of this section, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience, and having completed at least two projects of similar size and scope within the last five years. E. Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Company specializing in performing Work of this section, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience, and having completed at least two projects of similar size and scope within the last five years. F. Pre-Installation Meeting: Schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting at the project site before start of installation of polished concrete floor system. 1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including: a. Owner's Representative/Project Manager b. Project Architect c. General Contractor d. Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman G. Meeting agenda to include, but is not limited to the following: Review of existing conditions, surface preparation, system installations, field quality control, protection, environmental requirements, coordination with other work, controls to limit damage from dust and field quality control methods and reporting. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during actual placement, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, with coatings applied. B. Locate where directed byProject Manager. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 35 13 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. D. Accepted mock-up shall serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed polished concrete floor finish. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that would be damaging to completed polished finish. B. Provide ventilation sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete. C. Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer and applicator. D. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide hardening/sealing agent manufacturer's 10-year labor and material warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Polished Concrete Finishing Products: 1. Design Basis: Husqvarna Construction Products North America, 17400 West 119th Street, Olathe, KS 66061 - phone: 206-375-3066 2. Acceptable Manufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis requirements and requirements specified herein: 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BONDED ABRASIVE CONCRETE POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Floor Grinder: 1. Type: Planetary-action, Triple-headed grinder, 3-phase, planetary head and grinding discs with independent direction and speed control preferred. 2. Weight: 970 pounds or more 3. Grinding Pressure: 735 pounds minimum B. Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing: 1. Type: Heavy-duty industrial filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre-separator. 2. Power: 3-phase; built-in phase correction 3. Particle Filtration: 99.9 percent @ 1 micron 4. Filter: Three-way filtering; maximum dust containment 2.03 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS, SEALERS, AND GROUT COATS A. Hardener-Sealer-Densifier Agent Basis of Design: Husqvarna Hiperfloor, Hiperhard, Hiperguard, GM300, RetroGuard RG (Retro Plate Systems - 801-812-3420), 1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 - Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance. 2. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 - Up to 21% increase impact strength. 3. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 - No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. 4. VOC compliant B. Joint Filler: Semi-rigid, 2-component, self-leveling, 100% solids, rapid curing, polyurea control joint and crack filler with Shore A 80 or higher hardness. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 03 35 13 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 1. Type recommended by hardener-sealer-densifier manufacturer and compatible with hardener-sealer-densifier. C. Oil Repellent Sealer: Ready to use, silane, siloxane and fluoropolymer blended water based solution sealer, quick drying, low-odor, oil and water repellent, VOC compliant and compatible with chemically hardened floors. 1. Type recommended by hardener-sealer-densifier manufacturer and compatible with hardener-sealer-densifier 2.04 PRE-CERTIFIED INSTALLERS A. All bidding contractors must have completed manufacturer training and received certification in proper application and use of polishing machinery, diamond tooling, grout coating, liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard. Below is a list of pre-approved applicators. 1. Concrete Reflections 541-944-6355 2. BF Floors 714-325-0156 3. Emerald City Shotblasting and Concrete Polishing 253-222-1738 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B. Notify the Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use prior to commencement of polishing. C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved 3.02 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R. B. Steel trowel surfaces that are scheduled to be exposed. C. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal. D. Preparation for Polyaspartic Aliphatic Polyurea Coating System: 1. Verify that flaws in slab have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials acceptable to coating system manufacturer. a. Joints to be free of debris and excessive dirt, dust, clay, and mud prior to filling b. Joints to be dry prior to filling 2. Verify that slab surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents, laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents or other impediments to adhesion. 3. Concrete Adjacent to Floor Penetrations: Troweled flat and level with surrounding concrete 4. Verify that water vapor emission from the slab and relative humidity in the slab are within limits established by coating system manufacturer. 3.03 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following: 1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing 2. Contact with overspray of penetrating densifier 3. Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment 4. Contact with overspray of water or solvent based dye treatment 5. Contact with joint filler, crack or spall repair materials B. Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint, coatings and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect installation of polished concrete floor system. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA- Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2013a. E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2013. F. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a. G. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013. H. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2013. I. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. J. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). K. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. M. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the manufacture of concrete block. E. Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water repellent admixture. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. B. Handle and store ceramic glazed masonry units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove from protective packaging until ready for installation. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners. 3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 2. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized. B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); : www.h-b.com. c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; inch wide x by maximum lengths available. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc(including Dur-0-Wal brand): www.h-b.com. c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.05 LINTELS A. Precast Concrete Lintels: type, x inch size, psi strength at 28 days. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Type S for all applications. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: See Structural Notes. C. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. D. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. E. Grout: See Structural Notes. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods. F. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. H. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. I. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled. J. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. K. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.08 LINTELS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. 3.09 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.11 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. 3.15 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION 13uf152 01 �QZo3 Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. B. Manufactured metal items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs. B. Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and fabricate stair assembly to support a uniform live load of 100 lb/sq ft and a concentrated load of 300 lb with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/180 of span. B. Design railing assemblies, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 200 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. C. Design and fabrication of stairs and railings are at a minimum required to conform to NAAMM AMP 510 for metal stairs and AMP 521 for railings. D. Design and fabrication of railings in longer than 12 feet are required to meet more stringent requirements than industry standards to achieve a visual aesthetic straight line appearance and higher level of tolerance in joint smoothness without gaps. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Samples: Manufactured units. D. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design beams and railings under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop Primer: Multi-purpose structural steel primer, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Tnemec Series 394 Mio-Zinc filled polyurethane primer. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces, Shop and Field: SSPC-Paint 20, Type II - Organic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Tnemec Series 135 Modified epoxy primer. Tint to match zinc. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; [] minimum thickness; [1. 3. Fasteners and Accessories: Designed for use and loads, same finish as channel. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Unistrut Corp. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Delegated Design Railings: Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code. 1. Aesthetic Design Intent: As indicated. 2. Material: Round structural steel pipe or tube complying with referenced standards. 3. Jointing: Fully welded, Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. 4. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 5. Finish: 6. Railing Conditions: a. Wall mounted handrails. b. Stair railings and guardrails. c. Free-standing railings at steps. 7. Accessories: Per anchoring and securing requirements. B. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. 2.05 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified for exterior exposure finish. B. Prime Painting: One coat, 2.5 mils dry film thickness. C. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. D. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stairs with concrete treads. B. Structural steel stair framing and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings: Metal handrails for the stairs specified in this section. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2012. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. D. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013. F. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. G. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013. H. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and fabricate stair assembly to support a uniform live load of 100 lb/sq ft and a concentrated load of 300 lb with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/180 of span. B. Design railing assemblies, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 200 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. C. Design and fabrication of stairs and railings are at a minimum required to conform to NAAMM AMP 510 for metal stairs and AMP 521 for railings. D. Design and fabrication of railings in longer than 12 feet are required to meet more stringent requirements than industry standards to achieve a visuall aesthetic straight line appearance and higher level of tolerance in joint smoothness without gaps. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings. C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Welders' Certificates. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL STAIRS -GENERAL A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents. 2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code. 3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport and access to site. 5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape. B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical. a. Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. b. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only. c. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. d. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest quality gloss finish. C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level. D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required. 2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Architectural, as defined above. B. Risers: Closed. C. Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill. 1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches, minimum. 2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet. 3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch minimum. 4. Concrete Reinforcement: None. 5. Concrete Finish: Applied abrasive grit. D. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans. 1. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1 inch overhang. 2. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch wide. E. Stringers: Steel plate. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches. 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends. F. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design load capacity. G. Railings: Pipe and Cable. H. Under Side of Stair: Exposed to view, to be finished same as specified for other exposed to view surfaces. 2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS A. Wall-Mounted Rails: As specified in Section 05 52 13. B. Guards: Pipe railings as specified in Section 05 52 13. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Plates: ASTM A6/A6M or ASTM A283/A283M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. D. Steel Plates: ASTM A 283. E. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. F. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS, Grade 33, Type 1. G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230 with G40/Z120 coating. H. Concrete Reinforcement: Bar type as detailed, unfinished. I. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM Al53/A153M where connecting galvanized components. J. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer. 1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. Number of Coats: One. 2.06 COMPONENTS A. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03300. 2.07 FABRICATION -GENERAL A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Fabricate components accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. B. Stair railings and guardrails. C. Free-standing railings at steps. D. Steel pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. C. ASTM E935- Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2013. D. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Handrails and Railings: 1. Poma Corporation; Product : www.pomacorp.com. 2. KaneSterling; Product : www.sterlingdula.com. 3. The Wagner Companies; Product : www.wagnercompanies.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B. Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed force of 75 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. C. Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. D. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. E. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. F. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS G. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. H. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIALS A. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; cast aluminum. 2.04 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. C. Welding Fittings: Factory-or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded;joints and seams ground smooth. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D. Welded Joints: E. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. F. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. G. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Anchor railings securely to structure. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 53 05 METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed metal floor and stair tread gratings. B. Flat surface floor and stair tread plating. C. Perimeter closure. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs: Framing for grating and stair treads. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. D. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2014. F. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012e1. G. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012e1. H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013. I. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loading requirements. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size components by single support design. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction details, and tolerances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M; pattern as indicated. B. Sheet Steel for Die Stamping: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M Designation CS hot-rolled sheet. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 53 05 METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES C. Steel For Welding or Riveting: ASTM A 36/A 36M, unfinished, of shapes indicated. D. Steel Sheet for Lock Forming: Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M, FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. E. Steel Framing: ASTM A36/A36M shapes, unfinished. F. Aluminum For Lock Forming: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), extruded, shapes as indicated. G. Cross Bars: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M)solid bars. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips: Galvanized steel: 1. Type and Style: B. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating. 2.03 FABRICATION 2.04 FINISHES A. Galvanizing for Steel Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable. B. Verify that supports are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES 3.04 SCHEDULES END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 71 13 FABRICATED METAL SPIRAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Center support column, radial shaped treads . B. Spiral handrail. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings: Handrails at perimeter of stair opening. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish to underside of tread. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IAS AC172 -Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011. B. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992, Fifth Edition. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Load Design: NAAMM AMP 510. 1. Uniform Live Load to Stair: 100 lbs/sq ft minimum. 2. Concentrated Live Load to Stair: 300 lbs minimum. 3. Maximum Lateral Load to Handrail Without Permanent Set: 200 lbs. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed stair configuration, support loads, supporting accessories and connections, floor opening details, required floor opening and stair height tolerances, and other measurements affecting the stair. C. Product Data: Provide details of stair components and connection details. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating tread finish and handrail finish. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete assembly and anchorage requirements. F. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172). C. Design custom stair under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of products of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Tread and Riser Material: Steel, radial tread with nosing . . B. Column: Steel, with steel plate for base and top anchorage, drilled for attachment. C. Handrail: Stainless Steel. D. Balusters: Steel. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Attachments and Fasteners: Steel. B. Vertical Column Cap: Cast steel. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 05 71 13 FABRICATED METAL SPIRAL STAIRS C. Tubular Handrail Ends: Cast steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Assembly Fasteners: Concealed. B. Fabricate stairs to comply with NAAMM AMP 510, Class Commercial. 2.04 FINISHES A. Vertical Column: B. Top Surface of Treads: C. Underside and Edges of Treads : D. Handrail: E. Balusters: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are acceptable to suit stair assembly tolerances. B. Verify that supports are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install stair assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch for full height of stair. B. Maximum Angular Variation of Tread From True Position: 3 degrees. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing. B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. C. Roof-mounted curbs. D. Roofing nailers. E. Roofing cant strips. F. Preservative treated wood materials. G. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. H. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 17 33 -Wood I-Joists. B. Section 06 18 00 - Glued-Laminated Construction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2012. D. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce; 2010. E. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org)and who provides grading service Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Any PS 2 type, rated Single Floor. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 48. 3. Performance Category: 1-1/8 PERF CAT. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. Provide Weathermate Sill Seal Foam Gasket manufactured by DOW Corporation; dow.com, or FoamSealR Sill Plate Gasket, manufacturered by Owens Corning; www.owenscorning.com. C. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. Provide manufactured by 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. a. Treat lumber exposed to weather. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: G. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide provide the following non-structural framing and blocking that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.04 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. B. Drainage panels. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. C. Use complete system that is provided by a single Manufacturer source. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until dampproofing has cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: Sonneborn; Product Hydrocide 700B; www.buildingsystems.basf.com. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis Product requirements and these specifications include: 1. Karnak Chemical Corp: www.karnakcorp.com. 2. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing; www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Bitumen: Cold applied, water based emulsified asphalt, ASTM D 1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type III, Class 1). B. Asphalt Primer: As recommended by manufacturer of dampproofing. C. Sealing Mastic: As recommended by manufacturer of dampproofing. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Drainage Panel: High-impact polypropylene embossed core construction with fully bonded non-woven geotextile fabric cover sheet. 1. Product: Sonoshield DBS 2000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply bitumen by spray application or roller. C. Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of 1.5 gal/100 sq ft per coat. D. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation down to top of footings. E. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof sheathing, and exterior wall behind metal wall panels wall finish. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. D. Vapor retarder sheet. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Field-applied termiticide for concrete slabs and foundations. C. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. D. Section 07 51 00 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing system. E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). B. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. C. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2013. D. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014. E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014. F. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. G. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014. H. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012. I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013. K. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. L. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2011. M. FM DS 1-28 -Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007. N. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. O. U.S. FTC - Insulation product rating. The thermal resistance (R-value)of insulation shall be determined in accordance with the U.S. FTC R-value rule. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation Labeling: An R-value identification mark shall be applied (by manufacturer)to each piece of insulation 12 inches or greater in width. 1. Alternately, the insulation installers have provided a signed, dated, and posted certification listed they type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XI; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 4. Type II, 1.35 pcf, 15.0 psi compressive strength, Type IX, 1.8 pcf, 25 psi compressive strength for under slabs. 5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 6. Board Size: As indicated 7. Board Thickness: As indicated 8. Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 4.0 minimum per inch. 9. Board Thickness: 1 inches. 10. Board Edges: Square. 11. Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum. 12. Board Density: 0.7 lb/cu ft. 13. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi typical or 25 psi under slabs. 14. Thermal Conductivity(k factor)at 25 degrees F: 0.28. B. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XII; extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Size: As indicated 4. Board Thickness: As indicated 5. Thermal Resistance: LTTR-Value of 5.0 minimum per inch. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type II, Class 2, polymer bonded glass fiber mat both faces. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 4. Compressive Strength: 16 psi 5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 6. Board Thickness: 1 inch. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 7. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 6.0/inch minimum with total depth as indicated. 8. Board Edges: Square. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option. Where mineral fiber batt insulation is indicated, mineral fiber batt insulation must be used. B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 2. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 3. Thermal Resistance: R of as indicated on drawings. 4. Facing: Unfaced. 5. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero)when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Thermal Resistance: R of as indicated on drawings. 2.03 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION A. Insulating Foam Sealant: 1. Design Basis: Great Stuff by Dow. 2. Locations: a. Where board insulation does not meet or does not entirely fill cavity. b. Inside stud cavities surrounding openings. c. Roof to wall connections. d. Underside of bays and floor overhangs. e. Bay roofs f. Miscellaneous cavities and other locations indicated. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDER A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Reinforced laminated plastic, ASTM C-1136 Type II with the following characteristics: 1. Permeance: 0.02 perm per ASTM E-96-A. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 84. 4. Puncture Resistance: 125 beach units per ASTM C-1136. 5. Acceptable Product: Lamtec WMP-10 B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Tape: Same membrane as vapor retarder sheet, self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. adhesive-Sealant: Dow Corning 795. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Perforated Cover Sheet: White scrim reinforced polyethylene film sheet capable of protecting and supporting ball insulation under concrete. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION C. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install boards horizontally on walls. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.05 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. 3.06 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. In exterior stud-framed walls, attach sheet vapor retarder to inside stud faces with adhesive. Lap edges over stud faces, seal laps with tape. Lap ends onto adjacent construction; seal ends with sealant . 1. Seal penetrations and openings in vapor retarder sheet to penetration or frame of opening with sealant or tape. B. At window and door openings install sheet vapor retarder between frame and adjacent wall seal material and attach with adhesive. Seal laps with tape. Position lap seal over firm bearing. 1. When edge of frame will be concealed, apply tape between frame and vapor retarder to form a continuous membrane integrating frame. C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer temperature is out of this range. 3.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation mark installation: insulating materials are to be installed such that the manufacturer's R-value mark is readily observable upon inspection. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete wall and soffit weather resistive system: 1. Concealed sheet water-resistive barrier and air barrier. 2. Flexible self-adhesive flashing. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Weather-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not a vapor retardant and not necessarily air tight. B. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls,joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls water vapor-resistant. C. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls,joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air permeability no greater than 0.004 cfm/sq.ft. under a pressure differential of 0.3 inches water gauge when tested in conformance with ASTME 2178. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements- Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Installation instructions and standard details selected for this Project. 1. Indicate sequence of installation and coordination with building corners, windows, door frames, balconies and standard penetrations. D. Installer's qualifications and approvals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: experienced installing products in this Section. 1. Approved by exterior finish the sheet weather resistant barrier system manufacturer for work associated with guaranty of this section. B. Inspecting Agent: Certified by Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau for inspection of weather barrier systems. 1. Owner will select and pay for inspection service. C. Moisture Barrier Mock-Up: Separate—stand alone installation of complete weather resistive barrier system and wall flashing to establish installation standards including: 1. Bottom, top and corner of wall 2. Window and PTAC opening 3. Door opening 4. Standard penetration D. Pre-Installation Conference: Include Manufacturer. Review warranty requirements in conjunction with mock-up. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against failure of product to perform as specified and intended. Replace Warranty to cover defective materials. or installation. Include materials and labor. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL COMPATIBILITY MANUFACTURER A. Coordinate compatibility requirements of all Water-Resistive/Air Barrier System components and their accessory materials between manufacturers. 1. Use a single-source manufacturer for all Weather Resistive Barrier components and accessories listed below wherever possible to ensure compatibility and warranty requirements are met—or—coordinate compatibility requirements of all components between manufacturers. 2.02 SHEET WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Sheet Weather Resistive Barrier (WRB) (Water-resistive, vapor permeable, air barrier): 1. Design Basis: VaproSheild, WrapShield. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Basis of Design requirements: 1. Cosella-Dorken Products Inc: www.cosella-dorken.com. 2. Henry Company, Air Bloc. 3. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 60 00. 2.03 WATER-RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER TRANSITION AND FLASHING MEMBRANES A. Self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be WrapShield SA and VaproFlashing SATM by VaproShield, a zero VOC self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: 1. VaproFlashing SATM Orange: 11-1/2 inches or 19 inches wide x 164 feet long 2. Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa)when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 3. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) 4. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage B. Mechanically attached air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be VaproFlashing by VaproShield, a zero VOC mechanically attached water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: 1. VaproFlashing Orange or Black: 6 1/2 inches, 11 3/4 inches or 19 2/3 inches wide x 164 feet long 2. Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa)when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 3. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) 4. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Water-Resistive Flashing and Penetration Tapes 1. Tapes shall be VaproTape by VaproShield: UV stable, double and single sided, moisture-resistant flexible tape with adhesive backing having the following properties: 2. VaproTape (Single-Sided): 20 mil thick by 3 inches (76 mm)wide penetration seam tape 3. VaproTape (Double-Sided): 30 mil thick by 1 inch (25 mm)wide penetration seam tape 4. VaproTape UV-Resistant Black: 35 mil thick by 4 inches (102 mm)wide penetration seam tape 5. VaproAlumaTape: 20 mil thick by 4.5 inches (114 mm) and 9 inches (229 mm)wide, foil faced, UV stable, moisture-resistant flashing and membrane transition tape for use with silicone sealants B. Preformed Window and Door Corners 1. Preformed window and door flashing membrane shall be VaproFlashing Factory Formed CornersTM by VaproShield, an 18 inch x 18 inch preformed 90 degree inside corner Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS membrane with the same vapor permeance and resistance to air leakage physical properties as the primary air barrier membrane. C. Sill Pan Protection System 1. VaproLiqui-Flash a. Water Vapor Transmission: 14 perms @ 12 mils b. Hardness, Shore A: 40-45 c. Tensile Strength: 180 psi d. Peel Strength: 12 pli e. Elongation at Break: 400 percent. f. ASTM E 84: NFPA and ICC Class A 1) Flame Spread: 0 2) Smoke Developed: 15 g. VOC Content: 30 g/L maximum D. Flashings Panels: Provide at all exterior mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection envelope penetrations. 1. Combination of high-density polyethylene (HDPE), low-density polyethylene (LDPE), and thermoplastic elastomer weatherproof seal: a. Polyethylene: 1) HDPE, Specific Gravity, ASTM D 1505: 0.953 g/cm3. 2) HDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield, ASTM D 638: 3,100 psi. 3) LDPE, Specific Gravity, ASTM D 792: 0.917 g/cm3. 4) LDPE, Tensile Strength at Yield, ASTM D 638: 1,300 psi. b. Thermoplastic Elastomer 1) Hardness, ASTM D 2240, Shore A, 10 Seconds: 46. 2) Specific Gravity, ASTM D 792: 1.05 g/cm3. 3) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 490 psi. 2. Provide product models as recommended by manufacture for each application. 3. Product: Quickflash Weatherproofing Products, Inc; www.quickflashproducts.com or approved. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 63 00 - Product Requirements. E. Penetration Sealant: as recommended by WRB manufacturer. F. Fasteners: Vapro Caps; large, flat headed type, corrosion resistant. G. Other products recommended by manufacturer for complete, water-tight installation procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates. Do not proceed until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates. Seal or remove materials that are not compatible with products in this Section. B. Prime substrates for wall flashing with manufacturer's recommended primer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and details approved by Owner's representative. B. Unless otherwise detailed, the following procedures shall be considered as minimal requirements for the Weather Resistive Barrier System installation. C. ALL DRAWINGS TO OVERRIDE THESE REQUIREMENTS WHERE CONDITIONS DIFFER. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 1. WRB on Exterior Walls: Single layer, taped and sealed to form a continuous water and air barrier air-tight membrane. a. Over sheathing specified in Division 06, and other locations indicated. b. Install WRB from bottom of wall to top, shingle fashion. c. Lap vertical joints not less than 12 inches, and tape with double-sided tape so that tape is not visible as it fastens both membrane sheets together. Stagger all adjacent vertical joints. d. Lap horizontal joints not less than 6 inches and tape with double-sided tape so that tape is not visible as it fastens both membrane sheets together. e. Seal all perimeter edges joints perimeter and penetrations of sheet WRB. f. Lap flexible flashing onto Sheet Weather Barrier below openings. g. Seal all edges with manufacturer's tape, flexible flashing, or joint sealant to act as air barrier. 2. WRB on Soffits: Single layer, with 2 inch overlap, 6 inch side lap. 3. WRB in coordination with Flexible Flashing. a. Seal edge to flexible flashing at openings and penetrations. b. Prime Flexible flashing per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide Flexible Flashing at the following locations: a. FF at building corners: under WRB moisture barrier, 6 inches wide on each face. b. FF at bottom edge of wall sheathing, 6 inches wide c. FF at window, door, louver and similar openings: 1) Extend all areas to interior edge of framing. 2) Sills: Form a complete, sealed, drainable waterproof`pan' under windows, doors and wall louvers employing Manufacturer's recommended details. 3) Extend up jambs as indicated. 4) FF around various penetrations, 8 inches wide beyond penetration, form a seal onto penetrating item. 5) FF Under WRB where items will be surface mounted to exterior finish with fasteners through wall, 8 inches beyond edges of item. 6) FF at other locations indicated in Drawings. 7) FF at Flanged Windows: install to form a seal between window frame and underlying wall flashing. 8) FF at top of Parapet: from back side, over top, down exterior face 8 inches. D. Flexible Flashing Sealant: Seal edges of adhesive where it could bleed into finish. Seal joints waterproof. E. Install continuous, horizontal strip of flexible flashing at all concealed top edge of metal flashing, Section 07620, between metal flashing and wall. 1. Lap WRB over wall flashing and cover vertical surface of metal flashing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide experienced supervision of work in this section. B. Inspections by Owner's Inspector: Comply with recommendations of NWCB and approved schedule of inspections, but not less than the following: 1. Inspect substrates prior to installation of work in this Section 2. Inspect moisture barrier, wall flashing and sheet metal flashing 3. Inspect at least 10% of wall flashing installation at openings 4. Inspect completed moisture barrier system prior to cover 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product from damage due to harmful weather exposure and physical abuse. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural roofing system of preformed aluminum panels. B. Thermal roof insulation. C. Fastening system. D. Factory finishing. E. Accessories and miscellaneous components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. B. ASTM B209M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. D. Verification Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit samples of minimum size 12 inches square, representing actual roofing metal, thickness, profile, color, and texture. 1. Include typical panel joint in sample. E. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar to those required for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design is based on Span-Lok, manufactured by AEP Span. B. Acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com. 2. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com. 3. Firestone Building Products LLC: www.firestonebpco.com. 4. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS A. Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish. 1. Aluminum Panels: a. Alloy: Aluminum conforming to ASTM B209/B 209M; temper as required for forming. b. Thickness: Minimum 0.028 inch. 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.0 inch seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches. 2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.04 PANEL FINISH A. Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer's standard multi-coat thermocured coating system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of combination steel and closed-cell foam. C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency. 2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type. 3. Seam sealant must be factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying type. D. Thermal Insulation: Provide rigid type, faced with white, flexible, non-dusting vapor retarder tested for maximum flame-spread rating of 50, per ASTM E84; for installation using spacer blocks. 1. Isocyanurate Insulation Board: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, 48 by 48 inches. 2. Insulation Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick, factory primed, G-P Dens-Deck. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS 3. Insulation Cover Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick, USG Corporation; Securock. 4. Insulation Thickness: As indicated. E. Standard Underlayment: Grace Tri-Flex 30. F. Waterproof Underlayment: Grace Ice and Water Shield. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. B. Joints: Factory-install captive gaskets, sealants, or separator strips at panel joints to provide weathertight seals, eliminate metal-to-metal contact, and minimize noise from panel movements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Underlayment: Install standard and waterproof underlayment before installing preformed metal roof panels. Secure by methods acceptable to roof panel manufacturer, minimizing use of metal fasteners. Apply from eaves to ridge in shingle fashion, overlapping horizontal joints a minimum of 2 inches and side and end laps a minimum of 3 inches. Offset seams in building paper and seams in roofing felt. 1. Roof Pitch less than 3:12: Provide waterproof underlayment throughout. 2. Roof Pitch 3:12 and Greater: Provide waterproof underlayment at eave, rake, ridge, hip and valley as recommended by underlayment Manufacturer. Coordinate installation of standard underlayment over remainder. D. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS E. Insulation: Install insulation between roof covering and supporting members in two layers, staggered joints, to present a neat appearance. Tape seams unless otherwise approved by Architect. Install cover board over insulation. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls, with insulation, related flashings, and accessory components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under wall panels. B. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout,joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel and soffit panel, 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. C. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. D. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Substantial Completion, including delaminations or other structural failures.. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled. 1. Provide exterior panels and subgirt framing assembly. 2. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall. 3. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span. 4. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths. 7. Corners: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch returns. 8. Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, top coat over epoxy primer. 9. Exterior Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat. B. Exterior Panels: 1. Profile: Vertical; style as indicated. 2. Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, sealed with continuous gaskets. 3. Material: Precoated steel sheet, 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum thickness. C. Subgirts: 1. 16 gage thick formed stainless steel sheet. 2. Profile as indicated; to attach panel system to building. D. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. E. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; gage, inch thick; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. F. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. G. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant. B. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 05. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, stainless steel. Exposed fasteners same finish as panel system. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and leveled to uniform plane. Space at intervals indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. C. Provide expansion joints where indicated. D. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. E. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 52 00 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. SBS modified bituminous roofing membrane, cold process application. B. Cover board. C. Insulation. D. Vapor retarder. E. Base flashings. F. Roofing cant strips and accessories. G. Field Quality Control. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this section. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install a watertight modified bituminous membrane roof system with base flashing system and compatible components that will not permit passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product data sheets for each primary component with documentation of a formal quality assurance program indicating tested performance results for materials actually shipped to Project together with warranty at Project closeout. C. Installer Qualifications: Provide documentation of experience and references as indicated in 1.5 Quality Assurance. D. Manufacturer's technical representative submit to architect and envelope consultant field reports for each site visit. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Where in conflict, follow manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide documentation that the SBS modified bitumen materials specified, has been manufactured for at least the warranty term. 1. Provide to Owner documentation that a certificate of analysis will be provided with each shipment. Certificates of analysis to show test results of actual materials used on Project. Analysis to indicate minimum acceptable specification for material, actual material test results, and minimum test results for material batch/run used on Project, to show the following at minimum frequencies listed: a. Length and Width b. Thickness at Selvedge and Total Thickness. c. Weight. d. Selvedge width. e. Low Temperature Flexibility: every 300 hundred rolls f. Granule Embedment: Every 300 hundred rolls. g. Breaking Strength: Beginning and end of each production run. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 52 00 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING h. Compound stability: Beginning and end of each production run. i. Dimensional Stability: Every 300 hundred rolls. C. Installer Qualifications: Show that roofing contractor has been an applicator for the submitted manufacturer's products for 10 years prior to this Project. Roofing contractor to provide references for at least 5 projects of similar size and scope in the last three years. D. Field Quality Control: 1. Technical representative of materials manufacturer to periodically observe Work in progress during installation at a minimum of 3 times. 2. Representative, at a minimum, to be present to observe deck preparation, general installation procedures and final completion. 3. Notify Owner's Representative at least twenty-four(24) hours prior to any roofing Work. 4. Work not to proceed until such observations have been made and conditions have been approved in writing to Architect. 5. Installer to provide personnel trained in application of materials and systems and maintain supervision. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture; ballast materials may be stored outdoors. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane when environmental conditions are outside the ranges recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a twenty year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 20 year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent penetration of water. 1. Manufacturer's warranty shall not specifically exclude ponding water conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Base of Design: Siplast Modified Bitumen Roofing and Waterproofing Systems B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to basis of design requirements: 1. Firestone Building Products Co: www.firestonebpco.com. 2. Soprema, Inc; www.soprem.us. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. a. Substitution requests shall contain a line item comparison of physical and performance properties. b. requests must include documentation of a Certificate of Analysis. C. Insulation: Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 52 00 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 1. Polyisocyanurate insulation per manufacturer's requirements. R-value calculated at 5.6 per inch as recommended by the NRCA and RCI. 2.02 MEMBRANE AND SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Ply: Smooth SBS glass reinforced membrane. 1. Thickness, minimum: 87 mils. 2. Thickness, average: 91 mils. 3. Weight, minimum per unit weight: 0.58 lbs. Per sq. ft., ASTM D146. 4. Peak Load at 73° F, average: 30 lbf/inch. 5. Peak Load at 0° F, average: 70 lbf/inch. 6. Elongation at Peak Load, 73° F, average: 3%. 7. Elongation at Peak Load, 0° F, average: 3%. 8. Elongation at Peal Load @ 73° F, average: 50%. 9. Tensile-Tear Strength, average: 40 lbf. 10. Low Temperature Flexibility, maximum: -13° F. 11. High Temperature Stability, minimum: 250°F. 12. Dimensional Stability, maximum: 0.1%. 13. Water Absorption, maximum: 1%. 14. Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement: 500 cycles at 14° F, ASTM D5849. 15. Test Method: ASTM D5147, except as noted. B. Finish Ply: SBS glass reinforced membrane with white reflective surface. 1. Thickness, minimum: 130 mils. 2. Thickness, average: 98 mils. 3. Thickness at selvage: 94 mils minimum 4. Weight, minimum per unit weight: 0.90 lbs. Per sq. ft., ASTM D146. 5. Peak Load at 73° F, average: 30 lbf/inch. 6. Peak Load at 0° F, average: 75 lbf/inch. 7. Elongation at Maximum Load, 73° F, average: 3%. 8. Elongation at Maximum Load, 0° F, average: 3%. 9. Ultimate Elongation at 73° F, average: 55%. 10. Tear Strength, average: 40 0 Ibf. 11. Low Temperature Flexibility, maximum: -13° F. 12. Compound Stability, minimum: 250°F. 13. Granule Embedment: 1.5 grams per samples max. average loss, 2.0 max. individual loss. 14. Dimensional Stability, maximum: 0.1%. 15. Water Absorption, maximum: 1 %. 16. Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement: 500 cycles at 14° F, ASTM D5849. 17. Test Method: ASTM D5147, except as noted. 18. Base Flashing: SBS polyester reinforced metal or white granular faced membrane. a. Thickness, minimum: 146 mils. b. Thickness, average: 150 mils. c. Weight, minimum per unit weight: 0.115 lbs. Per sq. ft., ASTM D146. d. Peak Load at 73° F, average: 110 lbf/inch. e. Peak Load at 0° F, average: 2001bf/inch. f. Elongation at Maximum Load, 73° F, average: 5%. g. Elongation at Maximum Load, 0° F, average: 4%. h. Elongation at 5% Peak Load 73° F, average: 45%. i. Tear Strength, average: 120 lbf. j. Low Temperature Flexibility, maximum: 0° F. k. Compound Stability, minimum: 230°F. I. Dimensional Stability, maximum: 0.2%. m. Water Absorption, maximum: 2%. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 52 00 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING n. Thermal Shock Resistance, maximum: 0.2%, Union of European Agreement for technical construction (UEAtc). o. Test Method: ASTM D5147, except as noted. C. Coverboard: 1/2 wood fiber board 4 X 8 feet. 2.03 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289, Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core, and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 3. Board Edges: Square. a. ACCESSORIES b. Cant Strips: Premolded asphalt treated fiberboard, mitered to form a 45° angle at roof and vertical surfaces. c. Cold Adhesive: a blend of special adhesive asphalts and safe, high-flash, low VOC, quick drying solvents that meets or exceeds ASTM D 44799, Type II requirements. d. Liquid Applied Flashing System: Siplast Parapro 123, a liquid applied, reinforced catalyzed polymethylmethacrilate membrane (urethane or polyester membranes are not acceptable), which when used in conjunction with Siplast membranes will be part of the Siplast Guarantee. e. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. f. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type IV. Use only virgin residual petroleum process asphalt which has not been modified by the addition of softening oils or other compounds to modify the softening point. B. Primer: Conforming to ASTM D41 supplied by the roofing manufacturer. C. Sealants: As require by manufacturer D. Roof Walkway Traffic Pads: Provide manufacturer's roof walkway or manufacturer's acceptable equal, 2-1/2-feet wide, 5-feet long, 3/8-inch thickness minimum PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. 3.02 INSULATION INSTALLATION - A. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of roofing system. B. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Follow Manufacturer's minimum requirements for specified substrate. 2. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. 3. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. 4. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 52 00 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. C. Apply smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish-mouths, or tears. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. D. At end of day's operation, install waterproof cut-off. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Apply flexible flashing over membrane. 3. Around roof penetrations, mop in and seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. 4. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight. 5. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. 1. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule. B. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers. B. Section 07 61 00- Sheet Metal Roofing. C. Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. D. ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2013a. E. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1. F. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. See Section 01 33 16- Delegated Design Procedures. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and CDA Copper in Architecture Handbook requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 10 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 1.07 DOWNSPOUT PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS A. Sized for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual with the following parameters: 1. Design in accordance with this section and for any additional locations per the contract documents. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, glass fiber roofing felt. C. Flexible Flashing Underlayment: Product specified in Sectin 07 25 00. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. E. Primer: Zinc chromate type. F. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths, except where noted otherwise. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 2.04 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NRCA and SMACNA requirements. B. Roof Drains and Vents: Lead. C. Posts, pipes, and Conduit: Prefinished galvanized steel cone shape and counter flashing with draw-band and top sealant channel. D. Equipment Pads: Galvanized steel. 2.05 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Square profile. B. Downspouts: Round profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. F. Downspout Boots: Cast iron. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM G. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. F. Slope gutters 1/8 inch per foot minimum, unless indicated otherwise. G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight. H. Set splash pads under downspouts. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Trim and Through-Wall Flashing in Siding 1. Thickness: 0.0239 inch 2. Finish: Preprimed for field finish B. Gutters, Downspouts, and Scuppers 1. Thickness: 0.0239 inch 2. Finish: Prefinished C. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Fascia Flashings: 1. Thickness: 0.0396 inch 2. Finish: Prefinished in one premium metallic color D. Flashings Associated with all other types of Roofing 1. Thickness: 0.0239 inch 2. Finish: Prefinished in custom color. E. Sheet Metal Roof Expansion Joint Covers 1. Thickness: 0.0239 inch 2. Finish: Preprimed for field finish END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00-Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years experience or approved by Manufacturer. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants,field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. 6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements,will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a 10 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, watertight seal, and non-bleeding, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. VOC Content: Provide sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Roofing Sealant: 300 g/L. c. Single Ply Membrane Sealer: 450 g/L. d. Other sealants: 420 g/L. e. Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. f. Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Exterior Building Joint Sealant: Dow Corning 795, for vertical joints including: 1. Panel joints 2. Joints between products 3. Joints in sheet metal fabrications F. Exterior Building Joint Sealant, non-bleeding: Dow Corning 756 SMS. 1. Use in contact with stone or ceramic tile to assure no bleeding. 2. Provide non-staining warranty G. Exterior Pavement Joint Sealant: Sonneborn SL-2, 2-part urethane H. Interior Horizontal Concrete Joint Sealant: Sonneborn Epolith-P, 2-part epoxy I. Interior Vertical Joint Sealant: Sonneborn Sonolac, 1-part acrylic J. Interior Bath and Toilet Room Sealant: GE Sanitary 1700 or Dow 786, silicone K. Interior Acoustical Joint Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound, complying with ASTM C919. L. Colors: Selected from full range except where custom color is specified. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of all glass and glass units to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with authority having jurisdiction's building code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit center-of-glass deflection to the smallest of the following: a. The displacement associated with the structural capacity of the glazing unit. b. L/100, where L is the shortest side dimension of the unit measured in inches. c. 3/4 inch. 3. Thermal Loading: Design glass to resist thermal loads at service including those induced by differential shading within individual lites. 4. Thicknesses listed are minimum. C. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing of type indicated at glazing conditions where shown and where additionally required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide laminated glass at all horizontal, sloped, and overhead glazing applications. D. Heat Stengthening and Tempering: Flatness for 6mm glass panels shall not exceed 0.0030 inches for localized deformation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors of exposed materials for selection by Architect. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1. Delegated Design Data: See Section 01 33 16. E. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration and design. F. Samples: Submit 8 inch long bead of glazing sealant, selected or available color. G. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit IEQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weather envelope, including printed statement of VOC content. H. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. I. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that insulating glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. J. Installer's Qualifications. K. Sample Warranties. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. F. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1. G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. H. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a. I. ASTM E1332 - 10a Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation. J. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. K. GANA (GM)- GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009. L. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. M. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; Glass Association of North America; a 2009. N. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012. O. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASHRAE NFRC 2001 Terms and abbrevations: 1. U-Value = U-Factor, winter. 2. VTL = Visible Light Transmittance. 3. SHGC = Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. 4. STC= Sound Transmission Class, STC as tested per ASTM E 90. 5. OITC= Outside Inside Transmission Class, as tested per ASTM E 1332-10a. B. Safety Glazing: Laminated glass complying with ASTM C 1172, and testing requirements of 16 CFR 1201, Category II or tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, and testing requirements of CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II. C. Fire Protective Glass: Glass complying with and conforming to requirements of NFPA 257/252. D. Fire Resistive Glass: Glass complying with and conforming to requirements of ASTM E 119/NFPA 251. E. Safety Glazing Conditions: Requiring safety glazing by code or local authority having jurisdiction. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 63 00 ALUMINUM FRAMED SKYLIGHTS B. Set skylight structure plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or glazing panels. Anchor securely in place in accordance with approved shop drawings. C. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install sill flashings. E. Mask adjacent surfaces, clean joint surfaces, and install backing and field-applied sealants in accordance with requirements of Section 07 90 05. F. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 6 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb, Level, or Line: 1/8 inch per 10 feet, or 3/8 inch total in overall dimension. B. Alignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: Within 1/16 inches. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and inspection. B. Test installed skylight for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by methods recommended by skylight manufacturer. D. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 6 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 63 00 ALUMINUM FRAMED SKYLIGHTS B. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and structural adhesive glazing for horizontal joints. C. Glazing: Insulating glass. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6 members complying with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). Minimum thickness 0.125 inch for structural members and 0.062 inch for non-structural members. B. Formed Aluminum: Sheet material of alloy 5052, 5005, or 6061-T651 complying with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). Minimum thickness: 0.125 inch for structural members and 0.062 inches for non-structural members. C. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM A 36/A 36M; Steel shapes as required for strength and mullion size limitations, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. D. Glass: Type specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Perimeter Sealant: Type exterior building joint as specified in Section 07 90 05. F. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Silicone, ASTM C920, Class 25, Grade NS, neutral cure; maximum hardness of 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240 using Type A durometer; minimum tensile strength of 250 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. G. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc rich type. I. Protective Back Coating: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D 4479 Type I. J. Protective Back Coating: Zinc molybdate alkyd. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline. Make joints rigid, with connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof. B. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. C. Drain to exterior any water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system. D. Prepare components to receive concealed anchorage devices. Ensure that fasteners and anchorage devices will be concealed upon completion of installation. E. Adhere glass to glazing frames with structural adhesive and cure under controlled conditions in shop. Field glazing of frames to glass is not acceptable. 2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; exterior surfaces only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structural curb is ready to receive skylight system. Coordinate installation of roofing and other adjacent work to ensure weathertight construction. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply 1 coat of protective coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 63 00 ALUMINUM FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with the installation of roofing system and structural curb. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work, including leaks, discoloration, and excessive thermal or structural movement, within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: DeaMor Associates, Inc.; www.deamor.com. B. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to Design Basis requirements and to compliance with requirements herein: 1. Evergreen House, Inc.; www.evergreenhouse.com. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope; : www.oldcastlebe.com. 3. Super Sky Products Enterprises, LLC; : www.supersky.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS A. Metal Framed Skylights: Factory-fabricated, glazed. 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar. 2. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and structural adhesive glazing for horizontal joints. 3. Glazing: Non-insulating glass. 4. Aluminum Finish: Natural anodized. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements in accordance with the following: 2. Performance Class (PC): R. 3. Performance Validation: Skylights shall comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance requirements as indicated by having AAMA, WDMA, or CSA certified label, or an independent test report for indicated products itemizing compliance and acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Maximum allowable deflection of any glazing support member: 1/180 of span. 5. Design system to limit stress on structural glazing adhesive to 20 percent of tested tensile adhesion and maximum compression or elongation to 25 percent of neutral dimension. 6. Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, creep of concrete structural members, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness. 7. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft for glazed area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E283. 8. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft. 9. Design and fabricate to prevent harmonic vibration, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 2.03 SKYLIGHT COMPONENTS A. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 63 00 ALUMINUM FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum skylight framing system. B. Skylight glazing. C. Fasteners, anchors, reinforcement, and flashings. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand loads as required by building code. B. Maximum allowable deflection of any glazing support member: 1/180 of span. C. Design system to limit stress on structural glazing adhesive to 20 percent of tested tensile adhesion and maximum compression or elongation to 25 percent of neutral dimension. D. Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, creep of concrete structural members, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness. E. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft for glazed area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf in accordance with ASTM E 283. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a test pressure difference of 6.00 lbf/sq ft. G. Design and fabricate skylight system to prevent harmonic vibration, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation requirements. C. Performance Validation: Provide specified performance validation before submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate framed opening requirements and tolerances, spacing of all members, anticipated deflection under load, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint locations and details, and sizes and locations for field welding. E. Samples: Submit two samples, not less than 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating appearance of prefinished aluminum and specified glazing system, including glazed edge and corner. F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations. G. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Submit product data and calculations showing compliance with performance requirements. H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design skylight system under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of work of the type specified in this section and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL 2. Obtain Architect's acceptance of corrective Work prior to executing it. H. Cost of corrective Work and re-testing necessary to arrive at performance requirements are Contractor's responsibility. 1. Re-testing includes testing fees, Architect's fees, and Consultant's fees. a. Re-testing costs due to re-design by Architect will be paid by Owner. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for manufacturer observation of installation. B. Provide curtain wall manufacturer's field surveillance of the installation. Monitor and report installation procedures, unacceptable conditions and provide copies to the architect and envelope consultant. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sash for smooth operation. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Install firestopping at each floor slab edge. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. K. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch and minimum of 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to observe installation and make report. B. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. C. Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 503 to factory full test pressure. D. In-Place Testing Intallation: Demonstrating all common aspects applicable to Project. Include flashing and accessory products, Coordinated with flexible flashing and sill pans, initial units for in-place mock-ups. Coordinate Work in advance with all trades. E. Test one curtain wall of each type, as directed by Architect. F. If any curtain wall fails, test additional curtain walls at Contractor's expense. G. Repair or remove Work that does not meet specified requirements, or that is damaged by testing. 1. Where repair does not produce system(s)that meet specified performance requirements, replace system(s)components with new components and re-test. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL a. Expansion and contraction caused by 180 degrees F surface temperature. b. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing. d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads. 3. Design system to eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, to prevent vibration harmonics, and to prevent"stack effect" in internal spaces. C. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on indoor face when tested as follows: 1. Test Pressure Differential: 10 lbf/sq ft. 2. Test Method: AAMA 503 to full factory test pressure. D. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. C. System Description: concealed frame (structurally glazed), with operable awning and casement windows integrated within curtain wall system by manufacturer D. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Firestopping: As specified in Section 07 84 00. C. Perimeter Sealant: Type exterior building sealant specified in Section 07 90 05. D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. E. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.05 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide curtain wall products by EFCO Corporation; www.efcocorp.com; System 5600. Manufacturers providing comparable products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Arcadia Inc; www.arcadiainc.com 2. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products www.oldcastlebe.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 CURTAIN WALL A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 3. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent"stack effect"in internal spaces. 4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 5. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. 6. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the following: a. Positive Design Wind Load: lbf/sq ft. b. Negative Design Wind Load: lbf/sq ft. c. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum pressure. 2. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or deterioration of seals: Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL E. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 55 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a test pressure difference of 12 lbf/sq ft. G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. H. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. I. Overall System U-Value: Not to exceed 0.35. J. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. K. Design system to eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, to prevent vibration harmonics, and to prevent"stack effect" in internal spaces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal drainage details and operable hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Samples: Submit two samples 3 by 5 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glazing, infill panels, glazing materials. E. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations; include load calculations at points of attachment to building structure. 1. Comply with Section 01 33 16 - Delegated Design Procedures. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. G. Report of field testing for water leakage. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. Infinite Architecture Permit Set • PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 44 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED CURTAIN WALL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass, metal, and insulated spandrel infill panels. B. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10 -Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. C. AAMA 1503 -Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013. E. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013. F. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set: 1. Positive Design Wind Load: 40 lbf/sq ft. 2. Negative Design Wind Load: 40 lbf/sq ft. 3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, and maximum of 3/4 inch, with full recovery of glazing materials. 4. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E 330, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum pressure. B. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with building code. C. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or deterioration of seals: 1. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing. 2. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads. 3. Shortening of structural concrete columns. 4. Creep of structural concrete members. 5. Interstory drift of 6. Mid-span slab edge deflection of 0.75 inch. D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS 2. Exterior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of selected color. 3. Interior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of selected color. 4. Glazed Lights: Full panel width, one row; set in place with resilient glazing channel. 5. Operation: Pull rope. B. Door Panels: Flush steel construction; outer steel sheet of 0.058 inch thick, flat profile; inner steel sheet of 0.058 inch thick, flat profile; core reinforcement of 0.075 inch thick sheet steel roll formed to channel shape, rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails; insulated. C. Glazing: Type specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.02 DOOR COMPONENTS A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch thick; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick. B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. C. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open. D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels. F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. G. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. H. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle. I. Lock Cylinders: See Section 08 71 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. B. Apply primer to wood frame. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, manually and electrically operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. DASMA 102 -American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; Door&Access Systems Manufacturers' Association, International; 2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 4. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturers' product data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and list of prohibited chemical quantities. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. F. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. G. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS A. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 32 23 SLIDING/FOLDING GLAZED DOORS/WALLS PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 SLIDING/FOLDING GLAZED DOORS/WALLS A. Construction: Factory assemble sliding/folding operable panel frames as single unit, including head,jambs, and bottom sections; provide concealed fasteners. 1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims at perimeter of assemblies. 2. Joints and Corners: Flush, hairline and waterproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 3. Glazing: Factory installed. 1.02 COMPONENTS A. Sliding/Folding Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware including carriages with sealed ball bearing rollers, and top or bottom tracks. B. Weatherstripping: Brush seals, continuous and replaceable; provide between exterior doors, panels, frame and track. C. Exposed Hardware Finish: Manufacturer's standard. D. Hinges: Die-cast zinc. E. Locking Mechanisms: Minimum 2-point deadbolt locking of each panel; manufacturer's standard type. F. Swing Door Locking: Lever handle lockset with deadbolt into jamb strike; manufacturer's standard type. G. Anchors: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel in accordance with project and manufacturer's installation requirements. H. Sealant and Backing Materials: As'specified in Section 07 90 05. I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M, Type I. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. 1. Coat interior of frame with undercoating. E. Coordinate installation of hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. H. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. 1. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knockdown type. D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knockdown type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. E. Energy Efficiency Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Thermal Break Frames: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide where indicated thermally broken frame profiles available for use in both masonry and drywall construction. Fabricate from minimum 16 gauge galvannealed steel, with positive 3/8"vinyl thermal break and integral vinyl weatherstripping. Thermal break frames available as knock down types only. a. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1) CECO Door Products-Thermal Break SQT and SRT Series. 2) Curries Company-Thermal Break M and C Series. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Weatherstripped Frames: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide where indicated weatherstripped profiles with 1/8" integral kerf formed into the frame soffit able to receive manufacturers listed gasket material. Available for use in both masonry and drywall construction, with fire rating up to 3 hours complying with NFPA 105, UL 1784, and ASTM E-283 Test criteria. F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. G. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. 1. Do not prepare frames for silencers where weatherstripping or gasketting is indicated. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory-or shop-assembled frames. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Tnemec Series 135 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard, except silcone modified resin is not acceptable. B. Galvanizing Touch-Up Paint: Zinc rich primer compatible with finish paint system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 100 ("positive pressure"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (Underwriters Laboratories) - UL (BMD). b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures; with "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing. 4. Core: Mineral board. D. Energy Efficiency Hollow Metal Doors: 1. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design specified, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867. 2. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction. a. Design: Flush panel. 1) Roof Access Door Frame: 4-sided frame. b. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 "Laminated Core". 1) Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on- center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted. 2) Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold. (a) Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.8, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and threshold. c. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level A (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042 inch - 1.1-mm)thick steel, Model 2. d. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). e. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. f. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9". g. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. Exterior Frames: Not less than 14 gage. b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Frame with Opening Wider than 48 inches: Increase material thickness by 2 gages. 4. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead structure. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear"S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. E. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. F. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: Member of HMMA or SDI that produces products complying with requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 4. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 6. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 - Full Flush. 2. Core: Polyurethane, foamed in place. 3. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 - Full Flush. 2. Core: Kraftpaper honeycomb. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 - Full Flush. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. E. Steel glazing frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 1. Schedule: Coordinated with other doors, frames, hardware, glazing, finishes and accessories. D. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 4. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturers' product data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and list of prohibited chemical quantities. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". C. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40"above sill) or UL 10C.. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual, and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass tinted float glass coated float glass laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. E. IGU Fabricator: Company whose location, equipment, and processes are certified by the coated glass manufacturer. F. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1. A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for additional mock-up requirements. B. Provide mock-up of one of each type of glazing in exterior window, full size, including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene meeting prior to fabrication of glazing units and coordinate with meetings for glazing framing systems work. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, deterioration of coatings(s); and to provide for replacement of failed units. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as peeling, cracking, or related defects developed from normal use that are not associated with breakage or with actions in violation of written guidance from the manufacturer. Warranty to cover all costs associated with full replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass Units: Provide manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. Warranty to cover all costs associated with full replacement of failed units. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL GLASS REQUIREMENTS A. Glass Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than [6.0] mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Exposed Edges of Glass: Ground and polished. D. Performance Properties: 1. U-Factors (Winter): Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC), Visible Light Transmittance (VLT), and Ultraviolet Transmittance (UVT): Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Light Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 4. Sound Transmission Class, STC, when tested per ASTM E 90. 5. Outside Inside Transmission Class, OITC, when tested per ASTM E 1332-10a. 6. Assure that edge seal is compatible with glazing system. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select), unless otherwise indicated. 1. Float Glass Manufacturers: a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc.: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. b. Guardian Industries Corp.: www.sunguardglass.com. c. Pilkington North America Inc.: www.pilkington.com/na. d. PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppgideascapes.com. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-03; of class, kind and condition indicated; horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed. 1. Maximum roll wave distortion from top to bottom of wave as measured using calibrated industry accepted equipment: 0.005 inch. C. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent for 6 mm thick glass. 1. Ultraclear Float Glass Manufacturers/Products: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1. Ultraclear Float Glass Manufacturers/Products: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti. b. Pilkington North America; Activ. c. PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified, manufacturer, product , and color as scheduled. F. Anti-Reflective Glass: Float glass pyrolytically-coated both sides to reduce reflection and glare. 1. Manufacturers: a. GlasTroesch Holding AG; LUXAR Anti Reflective Glass: www.mcgrory.com. b. Pilkington North America Inc: OptiView; www.pilkington.com c. SCHOTT North America Inc; Amiran: www.us.schott.com. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. G. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's Tempering Division's"Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements scheduled. H. Scratch-Resistant Coated Glass: Clear glass with scratch-resistant coating, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Quality Q3: 1. Thickness: 8 mm. 2. Coating on outboard surface. 3. Basis of Design Products: a. Guardian Industries, Inc., DiamondGuard SRG or ShowerGuard. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 LAMINATED GLASS UNITS A. Laminated Glass: Float glass, heat strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Plastic Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral, 0.030 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated, or required by performance requirements. 3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tong-less horizontal method. B. Laminated Glass Unit Fabricators: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. 3. Hartung Glass Industries: www.hartung-glass.com 4. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 5. Certified fabricators of listed float glass manufacturers. 2.04 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING UNITS A. Film-Faced Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL-or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film. 1. Rating: 20-minute openings where hose stream test is not required. a. Products: 1) Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite NT 2) O'Keeffe's Inc., SAFTIFIRST: www.safti.com, SuperLite C/SP. 3) SCHOTT North America Inc.; www.us.schott.com, Pyran Platinum F. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 4) Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America: www.vetrotech.com, SGG Keralite FR-F. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Laminated Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL-or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film. 1. Rating: [45-] [60-] [90-] [120-] minute openings where temperature rise rating is not required: a. Products: 1) Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus. 2) SCHOTT North America Inc.; www.us.schott.com <http://www.us.schott.com>, Laminated Pyran Crystal. 3) Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America: www.vetrotech.com, SGG Keralite FR-L. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Fabricator/Manufacturers: Certified by coated glass manufacturer. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, clear anodized finish, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products"Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types"Article. 2.06 PLASTIC FILMS A. Plastic Film: Mylar type, [ ] inch thick, visible light transmittance of[ ] percent, solar light transmittance of[ ], shading coefficient of'. ] percent. B. Manufacturers: 1. Flexvue Films: www.flexvuefilms.com. 2. 3M Window Film: www.3m.com/US/arch_construct/scpd/windowfilm. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.07 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife grade consistency; grey color. C. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50 selected color. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 2.08 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: EPDM, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: EPDM, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; selected color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Smoke Removal Unit Targets: Adhesive targets affixed to glass to identify glass units intended for removal for smoke control. 2.09 MONOLITHIC GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type MG#1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 5.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type MG#2: Clear heat strengthened float glass. 1. Thickness: 5.0 mm. C. Glass Type MG#3: 1. Thickness: mm. 2.10 LAMINATED GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type LG#1: Clear laminated glass. 1. Outer and Inner Ply: 3-mm heat strengthened float glass. 2. Unit Thickness: 6.0 mm. 3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030- inch. 4. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type LG#2: Clear laminated glass. 1. Outer Ply: 3-mm fully-tempered coated float glass. a. Coating: Scratch resistant coating on No. 1 surface. 2. Inner Ply: 3-mm fully-tempered coated float glass. a. Coating: Scratch resistant coating on No. 4 surface. 3. Unit Thickness: 6.0 mm. 4. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030- inch. 5. Provide safety glazing labeling. 6. Application: Entry doors and as indicated. 2.11 INSULATED GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type IG#1: High-performance, low-e-coated, solar control clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. a. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING b. Manufacturers/ Products: 1) Cardinal, LoE3 366. 2) Guardian, SNX 62/27. 3) PPG, Solarban 70 XL on Starphire. 4) Viracon, VNE 1-63. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 60 to 65 percent. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 to 0.30. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. B. Glass Type IG#2: Low-e-coated, solar control clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. a. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. b. Manufacturers/ Products: 1) Guardian, SN 68. 2) PPG, Solarban 60. 3) Viracon, VE 1-2M. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass, except heat-strengthened float glass where required, and fully tempered float glass where indicated. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 65 to 70 percent. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.37 to 0.39. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. 2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION-RESISTIVE GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type FRG#1: 20-minute fire-rated glazing without hose-stream test; film-faced ceramic glazing. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. B. Glass Type FRG#2: [45-minute] [60-minute] [90-minute] [120-minute] fire-rated glazing; laminated ceramic glazing. Provide safety glazing labeling where required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 9 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. D. Smoke Removal Targets: Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and direction of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.07 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. GANA (TIPS)- Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004 (http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA(TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass : Clear tempered safety type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, square and lapped edges, 6 mm thick minimum. 1. Sizes noted on Drawings. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS 2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. B. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. 3.03 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal framing for interior partitions, ceilings and soffits. C. Resilient sound isolation components. D. Metal channel ceiling framing. E. Acoustic insulation. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wet Areas: Toilet room, bath room, shower,janitor closet, laundry room, walls within indicated distance behind or adjacent to a sink, trash room, recycle room, and exterior; see construction assemblies on drawings for diagrams indicating distances. B. Steel Thickness: Minimum base metal thickness per SSMA. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustic Attenuation for Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: STC of value indicated in Drawings calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90. B. Imposed Loads: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. E. Samples: Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board, 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating finish color and texture. F. Samples: Submit two samples of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application, 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating finish color and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 754, ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. Comply with more stringent recommendations of Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (NWCB). 1. Maintain one copy of standards at project site. B. Provide acoustically rated assemblies in compliance with listings for ratings indicated. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. D. Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. B. Brace and restrain ceilings as required by building code and AHJ. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: Member of SSMA or GA. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com. 3. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 4. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com. 5. Scafco Corporation: www.scafco.com 6. Steeler Inc.: www.steeler.com 7. The Steel Network, Inc.; www.steelnetwork.com. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Interior Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf, except L/360 at 5 psf for ceramic tile and L/720 at 5 psf for stone tile or stone veneer. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch or as indicated. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one leg only. a. Manufacturers - Resilient Furring Channels: 1) Same manufacturer as other framing materials. 6. Resilient Channel: Assymetric-shaped channel with face connected to single flange by single leg with alternating slots, 1/2 inch deep. C. Exterior Non-Loadbearing Studs and Furring for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09 22 16. D. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 40 00. E. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. F. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. G. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. Deflection and Firestop Track: a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly. b. Acceptable Products: 1) "Posi Clip" by Fire Trak Corporation. 2) "The System" by Metal-Lite, Inc. 4. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers- Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 5. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com. 6. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 7. PABCO Gypsum: www.pabcogypsum.com. 8. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC: www.temple.com. 9. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. b. Mold-resistant board is required at all locations. c. Mold-resistant board is required 5. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. c. Where indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. d. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 7. Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board. c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock. e. Lafarge North America Inc; Regular Drywall and Firecheck Type X and Type C. f. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. g. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Regular Gypsum Wallboard and PABCO Flame Curb. h. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Gypsumboard and Gypsum Board Fire Resistant Panels Type X and Type TGC. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES i. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. j. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 8. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture& Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. c. Lafarge North America Inc; Mold Defense Drywall. d. Lafarge North America Inc; Protecta AR 100 Type X with Mold Defense. e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. f. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard. g. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Mold Curb Gypsum Wallboard. h. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Comfort Guard Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. i. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. j. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels AR. k. I. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 9. Glass Mat Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmor Plus Abuse Guard. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 10. Unfaced Products: a. USG Corporation; Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panels. b. USG Corporation; Fiberock Brand Panels--Abuse-Resistant. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Impact-Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C 1278/C 1278M. 5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard. b. USG Corporation; Fiberock Brand Panels--VHI Abuse-Resistant. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile, wet areas as defined, and including tub and shower surrounds, shower ceilings, kitchen area, and mop sink. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) Custom Building Products; : www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2) National Gypsum Company; : www.nationalgypsum.com. 3) National.Gypsum Company; PermaBase Flex Brand Cement Board. 4) USG Corporation; : www.usg.com. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with ASTM C1288. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) James Hardie Building Products, Inc; : www.jameshardie.com. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 5. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M. a. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch. b. Fire-Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch. c. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. 2) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer. 3) Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; GreenGlass Tile Backer. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 4. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5. Type C Thickness: 1/2 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. American Gypsum; AquaBloc ("Greenboard"). b. American Gypsum; M-Bloc. c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board ("Greenboard"). d. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. e. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Board. f. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. g. Lafarge North America Inc; Watercheck ("Greenboard"). h. Lafarge North America Inc; Mold Defense Drywall. i. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. j. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Water Curb ("Greenboard"). k. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Mold Curb Gypsum Wallboard. I. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Water-Resistant Gypsum Board ("Greenboard"). m. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Comfort Guard WR. n. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. o. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. F. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES d. Lafarge North America Inc; Sagcheck. e. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board. f. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Ceiling Board. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Span24 Ceiling Board. h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board. i. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3-1/2 inches. 1. Green Guard label, and without formaldehyde. B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound at wet areas. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. G. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type, anticorrosive-coated at wet areas. H. Screws: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to 40 mil and greater steel studs, anticorrosive-coated. I. Nails for Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C514. J. Staples For Attachment of Base Ply of Two-Ply Assembly to Wood Members: Flattened galvanized wire type as specified in ASTM C840. K. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 111200. 2. Laterally brace and vertically constrain entire suspension system. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. 4. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. 5. Provide not less than 43 mil thick studs supporting wall cabinets and similar high wall loads. Refer to casework specification for design load. 6. Provide not less than 54 mil thick studs supporting plumbing fixtures, counter tops and similar low wall-hanging loads. In addition to dead load, support 300 pound live load located anywhere on supported item. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double 33 mil studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Spacing: As indicated. F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Locate joints over framing members. 2. Orient open leg facing up to receive gypsum board. G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. H. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Toilet accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door hardware. 7. Wall-mounted television. I. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions,wall cabinets, wood frame openings, toilet accessories, hardware, and other items as indicated. Comply with Section 06 10 00 for wood blocking with kerf for flange return. 1. Metal Blocking (where approved): Continuous 6 inch 43 mil track with legs cut at supports. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with most stringent of NWCB, ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board parallel to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer parallel to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board . F. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Adhesive application. 2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws or nails. Install face layer using adhesive. G. Air Barrier Seal: Continuously seal joint between gypsum board and top plate of exterior walls. Provide continuous perimeter sealant joint and sealant joint at all penetrations of upper most ceiling. Seal other joints and gaps to assure complete and continuous air seal. 1. Refer to Section 07 27 00 for continuous air and weather barrier system. 2. Refer to building section drawings for additional information. H. Attach gypsum board to resilient channels between framing members. I. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. a. All location unless otherwise noted. 2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. a. All locations recieving epoxy paint. 3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project. C. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840/NWCB Level 4 smooth, except where level 5 is indicated. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 9 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. 3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. E. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. F. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Tile for counters. D. Tile for shower receptors. E. Tile for stairs. F. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. G. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. H. Stone thresholds. I. Ceramic accessories. J. Ceramic trim. K. Non-ceramic trim. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 4. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturers' product data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and list of prohibited chemical quantities. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than of each type. 3. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING I. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCNA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings. 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 3. Demolish mock-up when directed by Architect, and remove debris from the site. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com. 2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 3. Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. manufactured by or approved equivalent product. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 1 inch square. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 6. Color(s): As shown on drawings. 7. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 8. Mounted Sheet Size: x inches. 9. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. C. Glazed Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. manufactured by or approved equivalent product. 2. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 4-1/4 inch square. 4. Edges: Cushioned. 5. Surface Finish: High gloss. 6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 7. Color(s): As scheduled. 8. Pattern: Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 9. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. D. Quarry Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. a. American Olean: www.americanolean.com. b. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. c. Metropolitan Ceramics: www.metroceramics.com d. Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com. e. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 6 inch square. 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 5. Edges: Cushioned. 6. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 7. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 8. Color(s): As scheduled. 9. Pattern: 10. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. E. Paver Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. manufactured by or approved equivalent product. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 6 inch square. 4. Thickness: 3/8 inch 5. Face: Plain. 6. Edges: Cushioned. 7. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 8. Color(s): As scheduled. 9. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, cove, and window sill or step nosing shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. F. Porcelain Tile: 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. 1. Soap Dish: With handle, clam shell design, recess mounted; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 75 lbs. 2. Toilet Tissue Holder: Recessed, for single roll, with spring loaded holder. 3. Towel Bars: Standard design, surface mounted with extensions for casting into small wall openings; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 30 lbs. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open edges of wall tile. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING b. Open edges of floor tile. c. Wall corners, outside and inside. d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. e. Thresholds at door openings. f. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall. g. Floor to wall joints. h. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings. i. Balcony and terrace edge trim and fascia. 2. Manufacturer: a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Genesis APS International: www.genesis-aps.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications: Provide at the following locations: a. At doorways where tile terminates. b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS 2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bonsai American, Inc: www.prospec.com 2. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. B. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, and water. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials for Thin-Set Installations: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 4. Furan: ANSI A118.5. 5. For Exterior Glue Plywood: ANSI A118.11. 6. Conductive Type: 2.05 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com. 2. Bonsai American, Inc; ProSpec Sanded Tile Grout 700: www.prospec.com 3. Bostik Inc; Product : www.bostik-us.com. 4. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com. 5. Custom Building Products; Product : www.custombuildingproducts.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Applications: Where indicated. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 2.06 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Uncoupling Membrane: 1/8 inch thick polyurethane matting with three-dimensional grid structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to provide a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive (DITRA). 1. Acceptable Product: Schluter Systems "DITRA." B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Type: Fluid-applied. 2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 40 mils, thick, minimum. 3. Material: Trowel-applied water-based acrylic membrane, 25 mils thick, minimum, with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement. 4. Material: Fluid-applied water-based SBS rubber membrane, 40 mils thick, minimum, with polyester fabric reinforcing at edges, corners,joints, and cracks. 5. Products: a. AVM Industries, Inc; System 700 with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement: www.avmindustries.com. b. AVM Industries, Inc; System 750 with polyester fabric reinforcing at edges, corners, joints, and cracks: www.avmindustries.com. c. COMPOTITE Corporation; Composeal Gold: www.compotite.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Type: Fluid-applied. 2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 40 mils, thick, minimum. 3. Material: Trowel-applied water-based acrylic membrane, 25 mils thick, minimum, with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement. 4. Material: Fluid-applied water-based SBS rubber membrane, 40 mils thick, minimum, with polyester fabric reinforcing at edges, corners,joints, and cracks. 5. Products: a. AVM Industries, Inc; System 700 with continuous polyester fabric reinforcement: www.avmindustries.com. b. AVM Industries, Inc; System 750 with polyester fabric reinforcing at edges, corners, joints, and cracks: www.avmindustries.com. c. COMPOTITE Corporation; Composeal 40 mil Blue: www.compotite.com. d. e. • f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Membrane at Walls: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Membrane at Walls: 4 mil thick polyethylene film. F. Membrane at Walls: Reinforced asphalt paper. G. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized. H. Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized finish. I. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 1. Product: manufactured by J. Backer Board: Coated glass mat type complying with ASTM C1178/C1178M; inorganic fiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder. 1. Product: manufactured by 2. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch. 3. Fire-Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING K. Mesh Tape: 2-inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install thresholds where indicated. I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F102, with standard grout. B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. C. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F122, with latex-portland cement grout. 3. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F131. 4. Where furan bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F133. 5. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F115. D. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F143. E. Over wood substrate with backer board underlayment, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F144, for cementitious backer boards, with standard grout. 3.05 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -MORTAR BED METHODS A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA F101, bonded, with standard grout. B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F111, with cleavage membrane, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, with standard grout or no mention of grout type, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F121. 2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F132, bonded. 3. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F114, with cleavage membrane. C. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook method F141, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends. E. Mortar Bed Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 INSTALLATION -SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method B415, mortar bed floor, and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls. B. At bathtub walls install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method B412, over cementitious backer units with waterproofing membrane. C. Grout with standard grout as specified above. D. Grout with standard grout as specified above. E. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type specified in Section 07 90 05. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 3.07 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. On exterior walls install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W244, thin-set over cementitious backer units, with waterproofing membrane. B. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. C. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. D. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W245. E. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. F. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W202, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat. G. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W231, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. H. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W241, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. 3.08 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Restroom, Janitor Room, and Locker Room Floors: 1. Tile: Ceramic mosaic. a. Size: 1 x 1 inch. b. Color: Color No. 1 for tile; Color No. 2 for base. 2. Base: Coved, 2 inches high, bullnosed top edge. 3. Installation Method: Mortar bed. 4. Grout: Silicone rubber. B. Stairs: 1. Tile: Paver tile. a. Landing Tile Size: 4 x 8 inch. b. Stair Tread Tile Size: 4 inch x depth of tread. c. Color: Color No. 3 2. Installation method: Mortar bed, TCNA S151, without membrane. 3. Grout: Cementitious. C. Kitchen and Food Storage: 1. Tile: Quarry tile. 2. Base: Coved base quarry tile. 3. Installation Method: Mortar bed with waterproofing membrane. 4. Grout and Mortar Bond Coat: Epoxy. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Resilient stair accessories. E. Installation accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. E. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. F. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710. G. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. H. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. I. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1. For linoleum flooring, report rapidly-renewable content and urea-formaldehyde content. J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Type : Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout full thickness, and: Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. 5. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal. 6. Sheet Width: 49 inch minimum. 7. Static Load Resistance: 250 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F970. 8. Heat welded seams. 9. Integral coved base with cap strip. 10. Pattern: Solid color. 11. Manufacturers: a. ; Product b. ; Product c. ; Product d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Type : Color and pattern throughout wear layer thickness, with backing, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type II, with Class A fibrous backing. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.050 inch minimum. 4. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 5. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following: 6. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. 7. SCS (CPD)- SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems. 8. Total Thickness: 0.080 inch minimum. 9. Sheet Width: 72 inch minimum. 10. Static Load Resistance: 125 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F970. 11. Heat welded seams. 12. Integral coved base with cap strip. 13. Pattern: Solid color. 14. Manufacturers: a. ; Product b. ; Product c. ; Product d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Type : Transparent or translucent vinyl wear layer over interlayer and backing, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type I, with Class A fibrous backing. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Printed Interlayer: Closed cell urethane foam. 4. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch minimum. 5. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 6. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. 7. Total Thickness: 0.080 inch minimum. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 8. Sheet Width: 108 inch minimum. 9. Static Load Resistance: 75 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F970. 10. Pattern: Solid color. 11. Manufacturers: a. ; Product b. ; Product c. ; Product d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Rubber Sheet Flooring: 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through total thickness: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 3. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.netimanual/lem_table.htm. 4. Total Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum. 5. Sheet Width: 36 inch minimum. 6. Design: Flat. 7. Pattern: Solid color. 8. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. b. PRF USA, Inc; Product : www.rubberfloors.com. c. R.C.A. Rubber Co; Product : www.rcarubber.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2034, Type corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. 5. Backing: Jute fabric. 6. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.098 inch, minimum, excluding backing. 7. Sheet Width: 79 inch, minimum. 8. Pattern: Solid color. 9. Color: As shown on drawings. 10. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 11. Seams: Heat welded. 12. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product : www.armstrong.com. b. Forbo Flooring, Inc; Product : www.forboflooringna.com. c. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. F. Feature Strips: Of same material as sheet flooring, inch wide. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING G. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color. H. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color. 2.02 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 4. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 5. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 6. Static Dissipative Tile: Installation system requires use of copper grounding strips supplied with Armstrong S-202 Adhesive and use only Armstrong S-392 Static Dissipative Tile Polish. 7. Static Load Resistance: 125 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F 1303. 8. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 9. Pattern: Solid color. 10. Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 11. Acceptable manufacturers pending conformance to basis of design requirements: a. Mannington Mills, Inc: www.mannington.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Vinyl Tile: Solid vinyl with color and pattern throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 5. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 6. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch. 7. Total Thickness: 0.100 inch. 8. Pattern: Solid color. 9. Manufacturers: a. Amtico Company; Product : www.amtico.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Flexco, Inc; Product : www.flexcofloors.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Rubber Tile: Homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness, and: Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1344, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 5. Design: Smooth. 6. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 7. Overall Thickness: 0.125 inch. 8. Base Thickness: 0.050 inch. 9. Pattern: Solid color. 10. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product : www.burkeflooring.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Flexco, Inc; Product : www.flexcofloors.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Linoleum Tile: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2195, Type corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. b. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 5. Backing: Synthetic fabric. 6. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.098 inch, minimum, excluding backing. 7. Tile Size: 19-1/2 by 19-1/2 inches nominal. 8. Pattern: Solid color. 9. Color: As shown on drawings. 10. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 11. Manufacturers: a. Forbo Flooring, Inc; Product : www.forboflooringna.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. ; Product d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness; nosing not less than 1-5/8 inch deep. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with FS RR-T-650 requirements corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Nominal Thickness: 0.1875 inch. 4. Nosing: Square. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 5. Style: Contrasting color abrasive grit strips full width. 6. Color: Solid. 7. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product : www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp; Product : www.roppe.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color: 1. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product : www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp; Product : www.roppe.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Stair Stringers: Full height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, matching treads in material and color: 1. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Pattern: Solid color. 3. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product : www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp; Product : www.roppe.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.04 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: 4 foot sections. 6. Length: Roll. 7. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 8. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 9. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product : www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product : www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp; Product : www.roppe.com. d. ; Product e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT A. Acoustic Underlayment: 1. Jumpax - www.jumpax.net 2. VC300 - www.vc300.com 3. Impacta Regupol 3mm - www.rubberunderlayment.com 4. Structus Superiur 11 mm - www.floorunderlayments.com/strukus.htm 5. Marathon Super - www.floorunderlayments.com/marathon.htm Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Modified Portland cement type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. 2. VOC Content: Comply with requirements in Section 01 60 00. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. 1. Specified required experience makes it incumbent upon flooring installer as ultimate source of product compatibility to notify the Contractor of potential incompatibility issues with adhesive and substrate prior to installation. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. F. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. G. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFC! Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate. E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply flooring with manufacturer approved adhesives for appropriate and correctly prepared substrates. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. 2. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. I. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern. J. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. 3.04 SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. B. Seams are prohibited in bathrooms, kitchens, toilet rooms, and custodial closets. C. Double cut sheet at seams. D. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish seams in sheet vinyl Type by heat welding. F. Finish seams in linoleum by heat welding. G. Double cut sheet; provide heat welded seams. H. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap strip. 3.05 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. C. Install tile to ashlar pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 3.06 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.07 STAIR COVERINGS A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 9 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING B. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile. C. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay and direct-glued. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1. C. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. D. CRI (GLA)- Green Label Testing Program -Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. E. CRI (GLP)-Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program -Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. F. NFPA 253- Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings, layout of flat wire system, and C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two samples 24 by 24 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material specified. E. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 2. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 3. Credit MR 6: Rapidly Renewable material content for each product. Product cost data. 4. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 5. Credit EQ 4.3: Manufacturers' product data for carpet, carpet cushion, and installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET A. Carpet Type CPT-1: 1. Product: manufactured by 2. Roll Width: 12 ft. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of / maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 5. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). 6. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: Modified Portland cement type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application, with attachment devices. C. Adhesives - General: Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. D. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. E. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. 3.04 STRETCHED-IN CARPET A. Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. B. Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not more than 3/8 inch. C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor. D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from carpet seams. E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams. F. Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours. G. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately. H. Join seams by hand sewing. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. I. Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly at other edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch. J. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless strip and wall. 3.05 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately. B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this section and on the Drawings. D. Surfaces to receive high performance coating are indicated in Section 09 96 00. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: LEED rating system definition. B. Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. D. Section 05 51 00- Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items. E. Section 09 96 00- High-Performance Coatings. F. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification. G. Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. GreenSeal GS-11 -Architectural Paints; 1993. C. MPI (APL)- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. D. MPI (APSM)- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master Painters and Decorators Association; 2004. E. USGBC LEED-NC - LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations; U.S. Green Building Council; 2009. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss and Sheen Levels: As defined by MPI except this specification uses common names defined below rather than numbered levels: 1. Flat or Matte Finish: Gloss Level 1 2. Velvet Finish: Gloss Level 2 3. Eggshell Finish: Gloss Level 3 4. Satin Finish: Gloss Level 4 5. Semi-gloss Finish: Gloss Level 5 6. Gloss Finish: Gloss Level 6 7. High Gloss Finish: Gloss Level 7 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system (copy of relevant MPI Manual page is acceptable). C. Schedule of Paints: List each coating and finish system for all surfaces that require paint. List special washes, surface preparation, sealers, primers, intermediate coats and final coats. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. List dry film thickness for each coat in each finish system 3. Identify minimum total dry film thickness for each system. D. Certification by listed Manufacturer's Representative that products comply with Contract Documents and are compatible with applicable substrates and with each other. E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification. F. Samples: Submit three paper"drop" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. G. LEED Submittals: Complete LEED Checklist and Tracking Form, Section 01 33 00, and other data for the following LEED Credits. Requirements and definitions are located in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00. 1. Credit MR 3: Salvaged, refurbished or reused materials; product cost data. 2. Credit MR 4: Recycled content for each product, post-consumer and post-industrial. Product cost data. 3. Credit MR 5: List products that are extracted, harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within 500 straight-line miles of Project Site, or percent of regional material by weight. Include address and distance of material source and product manufacture. Product cost data. 4. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 5. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturers' product data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and list of prohibited chemical quantities. H. LEED Report: VOC content of all interior opaque coatings actually used. I. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Minimum Standard: MPI "Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Approved Products List" and GreenSeal Label (GS-11). 1. MPI Renovation Standard: "Maintenance and Repair Manual." 2. Certified testing reports for all GS-11 requirements by independant testing agency may be accepted in lieu of GreenSeal Label. B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Manufacturer's Representative: Direct employee of Manufacturer who is authorized by Manufacturer to perform duties specified in this Section: 1. Benjamin Moore & Company: Randy E. Tessman, CSI CDT 2. Glidden Professional: Terry Decker, CSI, CDT, LEED AP. 3. Miller Paint Company: Amy Tacke, CSI, LEED AP, IIDA. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes: Raymond V. Nicholson, CSI CDT 5. Rodda/Cloverdale: Steve Gray, CSI CDT. 6. Sherwin-Williams: Brian Keil, CSI, CCPR 7. Yolo Colorhouse, LLC: DJ Widmer 1.07 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Provide wall panel, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. D. Locate where directed. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING E. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers are listed in Part 1, Quality Assurance. 1. Substitution Requests for Manufacturer will not be accepted. 2. Submit Substitution Requests for paint systems by acceptable Manufacturer per Section 01 60 00. B. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. 1. Coordinate shop applied metal primers and intermediate coats with work in Division 05. C. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. D. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. 1. Substitution of other products by the same manufacturer is preferred over substitution of products by a different manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS -GENERAL A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content and minimum quality: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. Green Seal Standards GS-11 and GC-03, South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1113, specifically: Infinite Architecture Permit Set • PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 4 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1) Opaque Topcoats, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum. 2) Opaque Topcoats, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum. 3) Anti-Corrosive paint: 250 g/L, maximum. 4) Floor coating: 100 g/L, maximum. 5) Clear varnish: 350 g/L, maximum. 6) Sanding sealer: 275 g/L, maximum. 7) Waterpoofing sealer: 250 g/L, maximum. 8) Other sealers: 200 g/L, maximum. 9) Stains: 250 g/L, maximum. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), inclusive of colorants added to a tint base and exclusive of water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). C. Paints and Coatings: Provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI Categories, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide Manufacturer's highest quality product in MPI category. 2. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings, except field-catalyzed coatings. 3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 4. Products in containers with GreenSeal Label. D. Accessory Materials: Sealers, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. E. Patching Material: Latex filler. F. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats)as defined in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. B. Where sheen is not specified or more than one sheen is specified, sheen will be selected during Submittals by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. C. Provide colors as directed by Architect. 2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Asphalt Paving Marking: 1. EXT 2.1B Alkyd/Traffic Marking: MPI#32. B. Concrete Vertical and Overhead Surfaces: 1. Applications include but are not limited to walls, soffits, and underside of concrete slabs. 2. EXT 3.1A Latex:Alkali Resistant Primer: MPI#3, Latex MPI#10, 11, 15 or 119. 3. EXT 3.1B Latex Aggregate/Latex: Latex Aggregate: MPI #42, Finish Latex MPI #10, 11, 15 or 119. 4. EXT 3.1C Alkali Resistant Primer: MPI#3, W.B. Light Industrial Coating: MPI #161, #163, or#164. 5. EXT 3.1C, W.B. Light Industrial Coating: MPI #110, gloss level 3. C. Concrete Paving Marking: 1. EXT 3.2E Latex Zone/Traffic Marking: MPI#97. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 5 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING D. Concrete Sealer: 1. EXT 3.2G Sealer, Clear: MPI #104. E. Cementitious Composition Board: 1. EXT 3.3C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: MPI #110, gloss level 3. F. Clay Masonry Units: 1. EXT 4.1 D Epoxy: Epoxy MPI #77, gloss. G. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. EXT 4.2C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Block Filler MPI #4, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI#161,#163, or#164. 2. EXT 4.2G Polyurethane, Pigmented (over high build epoxy): Epoxy Block Filler MPI #116, High Build Epoxy MPI #108, Polyurethane MPI #72. H. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 1. EXT 5.1B W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Inorganic Zinc MPI #19, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161,#163, or#164. 2. EXT 5.1C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Alkyd Metal Primer MPI #79, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI#161, #163, or#164. 3. EXT 5.1D Alkyd: Alkyd Metal Primer MPI #79, Alkyd MPI #8 with MPI VOC Range of below 25. 4. EXT 5.1F Epoxy(over H.B. epoxy): Epoxy Primer MPI #101, High Build Epoxy MPI #108, Epoxy#77. 5. EXT 5.1N. W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Epoxy Primer MPI #101, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #110, gloss level 5. I. Steel Subject to High Temperature: 1. EXT 5.2D High Heat Resistant Coating: High Heat Resistant Coating MPI #22. J. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivated: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors and frames. K. Aluminum: 1. EXT 5.4G W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Q.D. Primer MPI #95, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI#161,#163, or#164. L. Copper: 1. EXT 5.5G W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Q.D. Primer MPI #95, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161,#163, or#164. M. Stainless Steel: 1. EXT 5.6G W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Q.D. Primer MPI #95, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161, #163, or#164. N. Glue Laminated Timber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to beams. 2. EXT 6.1A Latex: Oil/Alkyd Primer MPI #5 or 7, Latex MPI #10, 11, 15 or 119. O. Dimension Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, and siding. 2. EXT 6.2A Latex: Oil/Alkyd Primer MPI #5 or#7, Latex MPI#10, 11 or 119. 3. EXT 6.2H Polyurethane, Clear, 2 Component: Polyurethane MPI #78. 4. EXT 6.2J Polyurethane, Pigmented: Polyurethane MPI#72, gloss. P. Dressed Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors, smooth fascia, and trim. 2. EXT 6.3D Semi-Transparent Stain: Wood Stain MPI#13. 3. STN: Transparent Stain: Timber Pro UV natural oil wood finish, preservative, penetrating sealer, UV protector. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 6 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING a. Transparent Stain Color: Selected from full range. 4. EXT 6.3G Polyurethane, Clear, 2 Component: Polyurethane MPI #78, gloss. 5. EXT 6.3J W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Oil/Alkyd Primer MPI #5 or#7, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #110, gloss level 5. Q. Wood Paneling Surfaces: 1. Applications include but are not limited to Plywood siding. 2. EXT 6.4A Solid Color Stain W.B.: Primer MPI #5,#6 or#7, Latex Stain MPI #16. R. Fiberglass: 1. EXT 6.7C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Bonding Primer MPI #69, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161,#163, or#164. S. Plastic(ABS, PVC, and PVA): 1. EXT 6.8C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Bonding Primer MPI #17 or 69, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #161, #163, or#164. T. Stucco Walls and Soffits: 1. EXT 9.1 B W.B. Light Industrial Coating: W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #110, gloss level 3. 2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete Vertical and Overhead Surfaces: 1. INT 3.1M Institutional Low OdorNOC: Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. B. Concrete Pavement Marking: 1. INT 3.2H Latex Zone/Traffic Marking: Latex Traffic Marking Paint MPI #97. C. Cementitious Composition Board: 1. INT 3.3G Institutional Low OdorNOC: Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. D. Clay Masonry Units: 1. INT 4.1C W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Alkali Resistant Primer MPI #3, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #151, #153, or#154. E. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. INT 4.2E Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Block Filler MPI #4, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. 2. INT 4.2G Epoxy, W.B.: Epoxy Block Filler MPI #116, Epoxy MPI #77, gloss. 3. INT 4.2K W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Block Filler MPI #4, MPI #110, gloss level 3, 5 or 6. F. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 1. INT 5.1N W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Epoxy Primer MPI #101, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #110, gloss level 3, 5 or 6. G. Steel Subject to High Temperatures: • 1. INT 5.2D High Heat Resistant Coating: High Heat Resistant Coating MPI #22. H. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivated: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors, frames, railings, and piping. 2. INT 5.3K W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Waterborne Primer MPI #134, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #110, gloss level 5. I. Aluminum (Not Anodized): 1. Applications include but are not limited to frames, sash, sills,flashing, handrails, railings, and posts. 2. INT 5.4A Alkyd: Vinyl Wash Primer MPI #80,Alkyd MPI #47, 48, 49 or 51. J. Stainless Steel (Not Polished or Brushed): Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 7 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1. INT 5.6A W.B. Light Industrial Coating: Bonding Primer MPI #69, W.B. Light Industrial Coating MPI #151, #153, or#154. K. Glue Laminated Timber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to beams and columns. 2. STN or CLR: WB Clear Polyurethane over stain (system not listed by MPI): Stain where indicated and 3 coats polyurethane. a. Basis of Design: Timber Pro UV, Crystal Urethane, non-yellowing, 145 g/L VOC. b. Stain: Manufacturer's compatible product, color selected from full range. 3. INT 6.1Q Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. L. Dimension Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to columns, beams, exposed joists, and underside of decking: 2. STN or CLR: WB Clear Polyurethane over stain (system not listed by MPI): Stain where indicated and 3 coats polyurethane. a. Basis of Design: Timber Pro UV, Crystal Urethane, non-yellowing, 145 g/L VOC. b. Gloss level 4. c. Stain: Manufacturer's compatible product, color selected from full range. 3. INT 6.2L Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. M. Dressed Lumber: 1. Applications include but are not limited to doors, door frames, window frames, window casings, trim, baseboards, and moldings. 2. STN or CLR: WB Clear Polyurethane over stain (system not listed by MPI): Stain where indicated and 3 coats polyurethane. a. Basis of Design: Timber Pro UV, Crystal Urethane, non-yellowing, 145 g/L VOC. b. Gloss level 4. c. Stain: Manufacturer's compatible product, color selected from full range. 3. INT 6.3V Institutional Low Odor/VOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #147, gloss level 5. N. Woodwork (Not Floors or Stairs): 1. Applications include but are not limited to paneling, partitions, casework, cabinets, and trim: 2. STN or CLR: WB Clear Polyurethane over stain (system not listed by MPI): Stain where indicated and 3 coats polyurethane. a. Basis of Design: Timber Pro UV, Crystal Urethane, non-yellowing, 145 g/L VOC. b. Stain: Manufacturer's compatible product, color selected from full range. 3. INT 6.4T Institutional Low OdorNOC: Latex Primer MPI #39, Institutional Low OdorNOC MPI #147, gloss level 5. O. Wood Floors and Stairs: 1. INT 6.5J Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, (over Stain): Semi-Transparent Stain MPI #90, Polyurethane MPI #31, gloss. P. Wood Shingles and Shakes: 1. INT 6.6C Semi-Transparent Stain: Wood Stain MPI #90. Q. Fiberglass: 1. Applications include but are not limited to decorative parts, posts, beams, pipes, and pipe covers. 2. INT 6.7A Latex: Bonding Primer MPI #17 or 69, Latex MPI #43, 44, 52, 53, 54 or 114. R. Plastic (PVC, PVA): 1. Applications include but are not limited to trim and plastic lumber. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 8 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 2. INT 6.8A High Performance Architectural Latex: Bonding Primer MPI #69 or 17, HIPAC Latex MPI #138, 139, 140 or 141. S. Spray Textured Ceilings: 1. INT 9.1E Latex: Latex#43, 44, 52, 53, 54 or 114. T. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 1. Applications include but are not limited to walls, ceilings, soffits, and bulkheads. 2. INT 9.2F Epoxy, W.B.: Latex Primer Seal MPI #50, Epoxy MPI #115. 3. INT 9.2M Institutional Low Odor/VOC: Latex Primer Sealer MPI #50, Institutional Low Odor/VOC MPI #145, gloss level 3. U. Acoustic Panels and Tiles: 1. INT 9.3A Latex, Flat: Latex Flat Paint MPI #53. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE --SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Paint all exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain natural; the term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in place. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: 1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item. 4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers. 6. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted; factory-primed items are not considered factory-finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finish. 3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 9 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING E. Measure the ph factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process, using the method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual. 1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work. 2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial action. If a different primer or paint systems is required, state the total cost of the change. Do not proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows for the applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as many as necessary for best results; where the Manual references external standards for preparation (e.g. SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards; comply with coating manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments, if any. B. Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other contaminants do not fall on newly painted, wet surfaces. C. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces, fittings, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before preparation and finishing. 2. After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete, Cement Plaster and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. J. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. K. Copper Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. L. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. M. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 10 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING N. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. O. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. P. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Sand wood to obtain a uniform appearance before immediately starting work. Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. Q. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. R. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. S. Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt_ 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified or recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as indicated. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush marks. 2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for the paint system that application method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for material used and objects to be painted is acceptable. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs, sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 11 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 2. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats. 6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 7. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes on Doors, Frames, Trim: Provide smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. 8. Transparent Finishes: Smooth, glass-like. 9. Stippled Finish on Walls, Ceilings, Soffits: Roll and redistribute paint to even, fine texture; leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; back roll final coat to achieve a uniform surface. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site. C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual. 3.06 SCHEDULE -COLORS END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior signage: 1. Room and door signs. 2. Interior directional and informational signs. 3. Emergency evacuation maps. 4. Plaque. B. Exterior Signage: 1. Building identification signs. 2. Site directional, traffic, and parking signs. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide"window" section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "In UseNacant" indicator. 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN"and "WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: D. Emergency Evacuation Maps: E. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings. F. Traffic Signs: To match campus standards; locate where indicated on the drawings. 2.02 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Clear. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. 2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch. 2.04 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: 1. Mounting: Tape adhesive. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Exposed Screws: Chrome plated. C. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2013. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. D. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A& J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316. E. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets, spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel; seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors. 1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl. 2. Towel dispenser capacity: 400 C-fold. 3. Waste receptacle capacity: 4 gallons. C. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror. 1. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 2. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. D. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners. B. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, surface-mounted with drain holes, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrate and backplate. C. Towel Bar: Stainless steel Type 304, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish. D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured steel box fireplace. B. Accessories, including spark arrestor screen and circulating fan. C. Insulated chimney flue and associated roof flashings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL 127 - Standard for Factory-Built Fireplaces; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Built-in firebox with concealed flue; rectangular shape; gas starter and circulating fan. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, electrical characteristics of fan. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, fan size. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fireplace components meet or exceed UL requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction, and 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for clearances from adjacent materials, chimney height above roof line requirements, and unit UL approval. B. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as complying with UL 127. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Fireplaces: 1. Heat& Glo; Product : www.heatnglo.com. 2. Vermont Castings; Product : www.vermontcastings.com. 3. Lennox Hearth Products; Product : www.lennoxhearthproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Firestop Spacer: Non-combustible device designed to fit between chimney riser and penetrated floor or roof construction framing. B. Roof Flashing: Prepainted sheet metal, configured to fit tightly to chimney riser and seal to shingle roofing system. C. Circulating Fans: Motor and fan, UL approved, 120 volt, watt rating, with remote on/off switch, sheet steel enclosure, and face grille. D. Spark Arrestor Screen: Steel mesh, set in steel frame. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013. B. UL (FPED)- Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class A:B:C. 2. Size 10, UL Label 4A-60BC. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Box Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim: Stainless steel. Returned to wall surface, with 2.5 inch projection, 1.0 inch wide face. C. Door: 0.036 inch thick stainless steel, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. D. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No. 4. H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Seismic bracket for extenguisher. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place extinguishers in cabinets. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. B. Laundry appliances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED)- Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. B. Energy Star-A voluntary labeling program designed to identify and promote energy-efficient products to reduce greenhouse gas emissions through a joint effort between the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. B. Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of AGA. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens. D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Refrigerator : Free-standing, undercounter, frost-free. 1. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency standards set by DOE. 2. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product : www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product : www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product : www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Range : Electric, free-standing, with glass-ceramic cooktop. 1. Size: 30 inches. 2. Oven: Self-cleaning . 3. Elements: 4. 4. Controls: Solid state electronic. 5. Features: Include automatic meat thermometer, storage drawer, oven door window, broiler pan and grid, and oven light. 6. Finish: Stainless steel, color Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 7. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product : www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product : www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product : www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Microwave : Over-the-range. 1. Capacity: 0.7 cubic ft. 2. Power: 1000 watts. 3. Features: Include turntable, cooktop light, night light, 2-speed exhaust fan, built-in trim kit, undercabinet mounting kit, and venting to exterior. 4. Finish: stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product : www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product : www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product : www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Dishwasher : Undercounter. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Wash Levels: 3. 3. Cycles: 4, including normal. 4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack. 5. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated. 6. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product : www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product : www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product : www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen cabinets. B. Kitchen countertops. C. Casework hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2006). B. KCMA (DIR)- Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; current edition, online. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, and countertop details. D. Samples: Submit two doors, 12 by 18 inch in size, illustrating each color of finish. 1. Exposed Hardware: Two each. 2. Concealed Hardware: Two each drawer glide and hinge. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Provide full size mock-up of casework base unit. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Residential Casework: 1. Lanz Cabinets, Eugene, OR. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber framing and particle board, tempered hardboard gables. B. Kitchen Countertop: Self edged plastic laminate over particle board, square internal intersection to back splash. 1. Side Splash: Plastic laminate over particle board, square internal intersections to back splash and top surface. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls: Chrome wire pulls, 4 inches wide. B. Cabinet Locks: Lock with 6 pin cylinder and 2 keys per lock. 1. Olympus Locks. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK C. Drawer Slides: Extension arms, steel construction. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate. C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity. D. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. E. Form smooth edges. Form material for countertops, shelves, and drain boards from continuous sheets. F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, appliances, and fixtures and fittings. Prime paint contact surfaces of cut edges. G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.05 FINISHES A. Exposed To View Surfaces: Stain, seal, and varnish of transparent color as selected. B. Interior Surfaces: Melamine Plastic Laminate of off white color . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 1 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Countertops for manufactured casework. C. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ANSI A208.2 -American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. D. AWI (QCP)- Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. E. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. LEED Report: Submit for wood products made from sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, and locally-sourced wood, as specified in Section 01 35 15. G. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. H. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program (QCP) inspection report and quality certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade or Grades specified. 2. This project has been registered as AWI/QCP project number 3. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels. 4. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 5. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and products meet the specified requirements. 6. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification. 7. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 2 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. NSF approved for food contact. c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade requirements for wear resistance. d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface. e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. f. Surface Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. g. Manufacturers: 1) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com. 2) Lamin-Art, Inc : www.laminart.com. 3) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar : www.nevamar.com. 4) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Pionite : www.pionitelaminates.com. 5) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com. 6) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood-Based Components: 1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00. 3. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 4. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines. C. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines. D. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2. E. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. Infinite Architecture Permit Set PROJECT NO. 2014-01 SW 67th Ave Office PAGE 3 28 AUG 2014 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch. C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Infinite Architecture Permit Set